www.siemens.com/drives
Main motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8
Type 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions
Installation Instructions
Edition 01/2019
31.01.2019 10:33
V22.00
Main motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8
Type 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions
Installation Instructions
Edition 01/2019
Introduction 1
Safety information 2
Description 3
Preparations for use 4
Mounting 5
Electrical connection 6
Commissioning 7
Operation 8
Maintenance 9
Spare parts 10
Disposal 11
Service and Support A
Technical specifications B
Quality documents C
Additional documents D
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG
Process Industries and Drives
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Document order number: A5E35768675A AD
Ⓟ 01/2019 Subject to change
Copyright © Siemens AG 2019.
All rights reserved
Table of contents
1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................................13
2 Safety information.......................................................................................................................................15
2.1 Information for the nominated person in control of the electrical installation .........................15
2.2 The 5 safety rules...................................................................................................................15
2.3 Qualified personnel ................................................................................................................16
2.4 Safe handling .........................................................................................................................16
2.5 Electrostatic sensitive devices ...............................................................................................18
2.6 Interference immunity.............................................................................................................19
2.7 Interference voltages when operating the converter ..............................................................19
2.8 Electromagnetic fields when operating electrical power engineering installations.................19
3 Description..................................................................................................................................................21
4 Preparations for use ...................................................................................................................................29
4.1 Safety-related aspects to consider when configuring the plant..............................................29
4.2 Observing the operating mode...............................................................................................29
4.3 Cooling water quality for water-cooled motors .......................................................................29
4.4 Ensuring cooling.....................................................................................................................30
4.5 Interlock circuit for the external fan ........................................................................................33
4.6 Interlock circuit for anti-condensation heating (option)...........................................................33
4.7 Thermal motor protection .......................................................................................................34
4.8 Overheating during periodic duty ...........................................................................................34
4.9 Noise emissions .....................................................................................................................35
4.10 Rotational speed limit values .................................................................................................35
4.11 System-inherent frequencies .................................................................................................35
4.12 Torsional loading of the drive train due to faults in the electrical supply ................................35
4.13 Transport and storage............................................................................................................36
4.13.1 Checking the delivery.............................................................................................................36
4.13.2 Lifting and transportation........................................................................................................36
4.13.3 Transporting a force-ventilated motor that has already been in operation.............................40
4.13.4 Transporting a water-cooled motor that has already been in operation.................................40
4.13.5 Transporting the machine set.................................................................................................41
4.13.6 Storage...................................................................................................................................41
4.13.7 Attaching the rotor shipping brace prior to storage ................................................................43
4.13.8 Protect the cooling water system of water-cooled motors......................................................44
4.13.9 Protection against corrosion...................................................................................................45
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 5
4.14 Converter operation ...............................................................................................................45
4.14.1 Connecting to a converter ......................................................................................................45
4.14.2 Converter input voltage ..........................................................................................................46
4.14.3 Insulated bearings for converter operation.............................................................................46
5 Mounting.....................................................................................................................................................49
5.1 Safety instructions for mounting.............................................................................................49
5.2 Preparing for installation ........................................................................................................50
5.2.1 Requirements for installation..................................................................................................50
5.2.2 Insulation resistance and polarization index ..........................................................................50
5.2.3 Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index........................................................51
5.2.4 Prepare the mounting surfaces (IM B3) .................................................................................54
5.2.5 Prepare the mounting surfaces (flange mounting) .................................................................54
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it ...................................................54
5.3.1 Preconditions for correct alignment and secure attachment .................................................54
5.3.2 Checking the load handling attachments ...............................................................................54
5.3.3 Removing anti-corrosion protection .......................................................................................55
5.3.4 Mounting the output elements................................................................................................55
5.3.5 Lifting and transporting the machine ......................................................................................57
5.3.6 Open the condensation water drain holes (water-cooled motor) ...........................................58
5.3.7 Open condensation drain holes (air-cooled motor, L12) ........................................................59
5.3.8 Putting the machine down......................................................................................................60
5.3.9 Roughly aligning the machine ................................................................................................60
5.4 Installing the machine ............................................................................................................61
5.4.1 Selecting fixing screws...........................................................................................................61
5.4.2 Preconditions for smooth, vibration-free operation ................................................................61
5.4.3 Vibration severity....................................................................................................................61
5.4.4 Aligning to the driven machine ...............................................................................................63
5.4.5 Mounting the motor ................................................................................................................65
5.5 Connecting the cooling water supply .....................................................................................65
5.6 Refitting the external fan ........................................................................................................66
6 Electrical connection...................................................................................................................................67
6.1 Safety instructions for the electrical connection .....................................................................67
6.2 Preparation.............................................................................................................................68
6.2.1 Selecting cables .....................................................................................................................68
6.2.2 Connect up the ground conductor..........................................................................................68
6.3 Connecting .............................................................................................................................69
6.3.1 Circuit diagram .......................................................................................................................69
6.3.2 Terminal designation..............................................................................................................69
6.3.3 Laying cables .........................................................................................................................70
6.3.4 Electrical connection data ......................................................................................................70
6.3.5 Connection with cable lugs ....................................................................................................71
6.3.6 Connecting aluminum conductors..........................................................................................73
6.3.7 Stepless mating face for the seal in the terminal box cover...................................................73
6.3.8 Performing connection operations .........................................................................................74
6.3.9 Internal equipotential bonding ................................................................................................74
6.4 Auxiliary circuits .....................................................................................................................75
Table of contents
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
6Operating Instructions 01/2019
6.4.1 Selecting cables .....................................................................................................................75
6.4.2 Connecting an external fan ....................................................................................................75
6.4.2.1 Connecting an EC external fan ..............................................................................................77
6.4.2.2 Connecting an external fan with three-phase motor (option L75) ..........................................78
6.4.2.3 Supply values for external fans with three-phase motor (option L75) ....................................79
6.4.2.4 Attached air discharge throttle plate (option L75) ..................................................................80
6.4.3 Connecting the speed encoder ..............................................................................................82
6.4.4 Connect the holding brake .....................................................................................................83
6.4.5 Connecting the temperature sensor.......................................................................................83
6.4.6 Connecting to a converter ......................................................................................................84
6.4.7 Converter operation on a grounded network..........................................................................85
7 Commissioning ...........................................................................................................................................87
7.1 Insulation resistance and polarization index ..........................................................................88
7.2 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning ..................................................................89
7.3 Perform a test run with the water-cooled motor .....................................................................91
7.4 Switching on...........................................................................................................................91
7.5 Test run ..................................................................................................................................92
7.6 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperature (optional) ................................................93
8 Operation....................................................................................................................................................95
8.1 Safety instructions for operation.............................................................................................95
8.2 Do not operate water-cooled motors without cooling water ...................................................97
8.3 Switching on the machine ......................................................................................................98
8.4 Switching off water-cooled motors .........................................................................................98
8.5 Switching off force-ventilated motors .....................................................................................98
8.6 Switching on again after an emergency switching-off ............................................................99
8.7 Stoppages ..............................................................................................................................99
8.7.1 Avoidance of damage to roller bearings during stoppages ....................................................99
8.8 Decommissioning the machine ............................................................................................100
8.9 Re-commissioning the machine ...........................................................................................100
8.10 Faults ...................................................................................................................................100
8.10.1 Inspections in the event of faults..........................................................................................100
8.10.2 Electrical faults at force-ventilated motors ...........................................................................101
8.10.3 Electrical faults at water-cooled motors ...............................................................................101
8.10.4 Mechanical faults .................................................................................................................102
8.10.5 Roller bearing faults .............................................................................................................103
8.10.6 Holding brake faults .............................................................................................................103
9 Maintenance .............................................................................................................................................105
9.1 Observe the operating instructions of the components........................................................105
9.2 Inspection and maintenance ................................................................................................106
9.2.1 Safety instructions for inspection and maintenance.............................................................106
9.2.2 Inspections in the event of faults..........................................................................................107
9.2.3 Initial inspection....................................................................................................................107
Table of contents
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 7
9.2.4 Main inspection ....................................................................................................................108
9.2.5 Regreasing intervals ............................................................................................................108
9.2.6 Changing bearings when using permanently lubricated rolling-contact bearings ................109
9.2.7 Maintenance.........................................................................................................................109
9.2.7.1 Measuring the insulation resistance during the course of maintenance work......................109
9.2.7.2 Maintenance intervals ..........................................................................................................109
9.2.7.3 Rolling-contact bearings.......................................................................................................110
9.2.7.4 Lubrication............................................................................................................................110
9.2.7.5 Cleaning the spent grease chamber ....................................................................................116
9.2.7.6 Maintaining the cooling water system ..................................................................................116
9.2.7.7 Servicing the external fan.....................................................................................................116
9.2.7.8 Maintaining terminal boxes ..................................................................................................118
9.3 Repair...................................................................................................................................119
9.3.1 Prepare servicing work.........................................................................................................119
9.3.2 Screws with preCOTE coating .............................................................................................120
9.3.3 Disassembling a water-cooled motor ...................................................................................120
9.3.4 Dissembling a force-ventilated motor...................................................................................121
9.3.5 Removing and installing the protecting ring .........................................................................122
9.3.6 Removing and mounting the bearing shields .......................................................................123
9.3.7 Installing and sealing the motor ...........................................................................................123
9.3.8 Sealing the motor (type 1PH828.)........................................................................................125
9.3.9 Relocating the external fan (type 1PH828.) .........................................................................126
9.3.10 Removing and mounting the external fan ............................................................................126
9.3.11 Removing and mounting the speed sensor..........................................................................128
9.3.12 Connecting the speed encoder ............................................................................................130
9.3.13 Replacing the DRIVE-CLiQ interface (encoder module)......................................................130
9.3.14 Touch up any damaged paintwork .......................................................................................131
10 Spare parts ...............................................................................................................................................133
10.1 Ordering data .......................................................................................................................133
10.2 Spare parts kits ....................................................................................................................133
10.3 Holding brake .......................................................................................................................134
10.4 Ordering spare parts via the Internet ...................................................................................134
10.5 Anti-condensation heating....................................................................................................135
10.6 Water-cooled motor..............................................................................................................135
10.6.1 Water-cooled motor, complete .............................................................................................135
10.6.2 Roller bearing cartridge DE with radial shaft sealing ring with regreasing ...........................136
10.6.3 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, belt coupling..........................................................137
10.6.4 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, coupling output, with regreasing ...........................138
10.6.5 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, coupling output, with permanent lubrication .........139
10.6.6 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, with permanent lubrication.............................140
10.6.7 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)............................141
10.6.8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)............................................142
10.6.9 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end "Performance" ................................................143
10.7 Force-ventilated motor .........................................................................................................144
10.7.1 Force-ventilated motor, complete.........................................................................................144
10.7.2 External fan ..........................................................................................................................145
10.7.3 External fan (option L75)......................................................................................................145
10.7.4 Roller bearing cartridge DE with radial shaft sealing ring with regreasing ...........................146
Table of contents
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
8Operating Instructions 01/2019
10.7.5 Roller bearing cartridge DE, belt coupling............................................................................147
10.7.6 Roller bearing cartridge DE, coupling output, with regreasing .............................................148
10.7.7 Roller bearing cartridge DE, coupling output, with permanent lubrication ...........................149
10.7.8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with permanent lubrication ...................................................150
10.7.9 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)............................151
10.7.10 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)............................................152
10.7.11 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, "Performance" ......................................................................153
10.8 Terminal box ........................................................................................................................154
10.9 Speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)............................................................................155
10.10 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.)............................................................................................156
11 Disposal....................................................................................................................................................157
11.1 RoHS - restricting the use of certain hazardous substances ...............................................157
11.2 Information according to Article 33 of the REACH regulation ..............................................157
11.3 Preparing for disassembly....................................................................................................158
11.4 Dismantling the machine......................................................................................................158
11.5 Disposal of components.......................................................................................................158
A Service and Support .................................................................................................................................161
B Technical specifications............................................................................................................................163
B.1 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections..............................................................163
C Quality documents....................................................................................................................................165
D Additional documents ...............................................................................................................................167
D.1 Reader notes on the operating instructions of the holding brake.........................................167
D.2 Operating instructions, holding brake...................................................................................169
D.3 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH180 .....................193
D.4 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH225 .....................207
D.5 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180 ...................221
D.6 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225 ...................235
D.7 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK180.......................249
D.8 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK225.......................263
D.9 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180 ....................279
D.10 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225 ....................293
D.11 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SH280.......................309
Index.........................................................................................................................................................323
Tables
Table 3-1 Elements on the rating plate........................................................................................................22
Table 3-2 Machine design ........................................................................................................................23
Table of contents
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 9
Table 3-3 Technical data of the holding brake ............................................................................................26
Table 3-4 Roller bearing versions .............................................................................................................27
Table 4-1 Cooling water specification .......................................................................................................29
Table 4-2 Pressure drop in motors with pipe connection .........................................................................33
Table 4-3 Tightening torque and preloading force for axially fixing the rotor ..............................................39
Table 5-1 Stator winding insulation resistance at 40° C..............................................................................52
Table 5-2 Maximum permitted radial vibration severity...............................................................................62
Table 5-3 Maximum permitted axial vibration severity ................................................................................62
Table 5-4 Permissible deviations when aligning the motor .........................................................................64
Table 5-5 Rate of flow and pressure drop ...................................................................................................66
Table 6-1 Terminal designations using the 1U1-1 as an example ..............................................................69
Table 6-2 Data for electrical connection......................................................................................................71
Table 7-1 Minimum radial forces .................................................................................................................90
Table 7-2 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperatures before commissioning ...............................93
Table 7-3 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperatures ...................................................................93
Table 8-1 Electrical faults .......................................................................................................................101
Table 8-2 Electrical faults .......................................................................................................................102
Table 8-3 Mechanical faults.......................................................................................................................102
Table 8-4 Roller bearing faults .............................................................................................................103
Table 9-1 Checks after installation or repair .............................................................................................107
Table 9-2 Checks that must be performed during the main inspection .....................................................108
Table 9-3 Maintenance measures.............................................................................................................109
Table 9-4 Criteria for selecting roller bearing greases...............................................................................111
Table 9-5 Roller bearing greases for vertical and horizontal types of construction ..................................112
Table 9-6 Alternative greases with NLGI Class 2 for motors with a horizontal type of construction .........112
Table 9-7 Grease for the "Performance" version.......................................................................................112
Table 10-1 Motor, complete ........................................................................................................................135
Table 10-2 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with
regreasing ................................................................................................................................136
Table 10-3 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing ......137
Table 10-4 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing ....138
Table 10-5 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent
lubrication .................................................................................................................................139
Table 10-6 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, permanent lubrication .................140
Table 10-7 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) ..............141
Table 10-8 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.) ...............................142
Table 10-9 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing.............................143
Table 10-10 Motor, complete .......................................................................................................................144
Table 10-11 Spare parts for external fan.......................................................................................................145
Table of contents
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
10 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Table 10-12 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with
regreasing ................................................................................................................................146
Table 10-13 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing ......147
Table 10-14 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing ....148
Table 10-15 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent
lubrication .................................................................................................................................149
Table 10-16 Spare parts for roller bearing cartridge, non-drive end, permanent lubrication ........................150
Table 10-17 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) ..............151
Table 10-18 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.) ..............................152
Table 10-19 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing.............................153
Table 10-20 Spare parts for terminal box .....................................................................................................154
Table 10-21 Spare part, speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) ..............................................................155
Table 10-22 Spare part, speed encoder (type 1PH828.) ............................................................................156
Table B-1 Tightening torques for bolted connections with a tolerance of ±10%........................................163
Table D-1 Technical data of the holding brake ..........................................................................................167
Figures
Figure 3-1 Schematic layout of rating plate ..................................................................................................21
Figure 4-1 Air guidance from the DE to the NDE (schematic representation, types 1PH818. and
1PH822.) .....................................................................................................................................31
Figure 4-2 Bypass for 1PH822. for IP23 ......................................................................................................32
Figure 4-3 Air guidance from the NDE to the DE (schematic representation, type 1PH828.) for IP55 ........32
Figure 4-4 Lifting the machine (schematic representation)...........................................................................38
Figure 4-5 Rotor shipping brace ...................................................................................................................39
Figure 4-6 Schematic representation of a single drive .................................................................................47
Figure 5-1 Balancing type on the drive-end side ..........................................................................................55
Figure 5-2 Water drain holes ........................................................................................................................59
Figure 5-3 Water drain holes, for types 1PH818., 1PH822. .........................................................................59
Figure 5-4 Max. permissible vibration velocity, taking into account the vibration displacement and
vibration acceleration ..................................................................................................................62
Figure 5-5 Aligning the motor .......................................................................................................................64
Figure 6-1 Terminal lug ① for the grounding conductor for a force-ventilated motor ..................................68
Figure 6-2 Terminal lug ① for the grounding conductor for a water-cooled motor ......................................69
Figure 6-3 External fan terminal box ① (schematic representation)............................................................77
Figure 6-4 External fan terminal box ① (schematic representation)............................................................78
Figure 6-5 Throttle plate for suction-type ventilation (DE to NDE)................................................................81
Figure 6-6 Throttle plate for forced-draft ventilation (NDE to DE).................................................................81
Figure 6-7 Detailed view: Plug-in connection ..............................................................................................82
Figure 6-8 Sensor Module ① mounted on the terminal box ........................................................................83
Figure 9-1 Flat grease nipples ① and ②, schematic representation for types 1PH818. and 1PH822. ....115
Table of contents
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 11
Figure 9-2 Flat grease nipple ① and ② (schematic representation for type 1PH828.) ............................115
Figure 9-3 Fitting the protecting ring...........................................................................................................123
Figure 9-4 Sealing gap between the enclosure and bearing shields (schematic representation) ..............125
Figure 9-5 Installing the rotary shaft seal....................................................................................................126
Figure 9-6 Unscrewing the external fan (1PH818., 1PH822.) ....................................................................127
Figure 9-7 Unscrewing the external fan (1PH828.) ....................................................................................127
Figure 9-8 Detailed view of the speed encoder ..........................................................................................128
Figure 9-9 Electrical connection of the speed sensor ................................................................................130
Figure 10-1 Schematic diagram of motor (complete) ...................................................................................135
Figure 10-2 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing .......................136
Figure 10-3 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing..............................137
Figure 10-4 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing.........................138
Figure 10-5 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication .......139
Figure 10-6 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, permanent lubrication ........................................140
Figure 10-7 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.).................................141
Figure 10-8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.).................................................142
Figure 10-9 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing ...................................................143
Figure 10-10 Schematic representation of the motor, complete.....................................................................144
Figure 10-11 Spare parts for external fan (type 1PH818., 1PH822.) ............................................................145
Figure 10-12 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing .......................146
Figure 10-13 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing..............................147
Figure 10-14 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing.........................148
Figure 10-15 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication .......149
Figure 10-16 Roller bearing cartridge, non-drive end, permanent lubrication ...............................................150
Figure 10-17 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.).................................151
Figure 10-18 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.).................................................152
Figure 10-19 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing ...................................................153
Figure 10-20 Terminal box..............................................................................................................................154
Figure 10-21 Speed encoder..........................................................................................................................155
Figure 10-22 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.).................................................................................................156
Table of contents
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
12 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Introduction 1
In the following text, the motor is referred to as "electrical machine" – or abbreviated, just
"machine".
These operating instructions are valid for 1PH8 induction motors in shaft heights 180 ... 280 in
a force-ventilated or water-cooled version.
● 1PH818.1 and 1PH818.3
● 1PH822.1 and 1PH822.3
● 1PH828.1
The serial number of the motor can be found on the rating plate.
These instructions describe the machine and explain how to handle it, from initial delivery to
final disposal of the equipment. Keep these instructions for later use.
Read these operating instructions before you handle the machine and follow the instructions to
become familiar with its design and operating principles and thus ensure safe, problem-free
machine operation and long service life.
Safety instructions and handling-related warning notes are provided in these instructions.
When carrying out any activity at or with the machine, carefully comply with all of these notes
for your own safety, to protect other people and to avoid material damage.
Please contact the Service Center (Page 161) if you have any suggestions on how to improve
this document.
Text format features
You can find the following text format features in these instructions:
1. Handling instructions are always formatted as a numbered list. Always perform the steps in
the order given.
● Lists are formatted as bulleted lists.
– Lists on the second level are hyphenated.
Note
The note provides you with additional information about the product itself, handling the product
- and the relevant documentation.
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 13
Introduction
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
14 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Safety information 2
2.1 Information for the nominated person in control of the electrical
installation
This electric machine has been designed and built in accordance with the specifications
contained in Directive 2014/35/EU ("Low-Voltage Directive") and is intended for use in
industrial plants. Please observe the country-specific regulations when using the electric
machine outside the European Community. Follow the local and industry-specific safety and
setup regulations.
The persons responsible for the plant must ensure the following:
● Planning and configuration work and all work carried out on and with the machine is only to
be done by qualified personnel.
● The operating instructions must always be available for all work.
● The technical data as well as the specifications relating to the permissible installation,
connection, ambient and operating conditions are taken into account at all times.
● The specific setup and safety regulations as well as regulations on the use of personal
protective equipment are observed.
Note
Use the services and support provided by the local service center (Page 161) for planning,
installation, commissioning and service work.
2.2 The 5 safety rules
For your own personal safety and to prevent material damage when carrying out any work,
always observe the safety-relevant instructions and the following five safety rules according to
EN 50110‑1 "Working in a voltage-free state". Apply the five safety rules in the sequence stated
before starting work.
5 safety rules
1. Disconnect the system.
Also disconnect the auxiliary circuits, for example, anti-condensation heating.
2. Secure against reconnection.
3. Verify absence of operating voltage.
4. Ground and short-circuit.
5. Provide protection against adjacent live parts.
To energize the system, apply the measures in reverse order.
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 15
2.3 Qualified personnel
All work at the machine must be carried out by qualified personnel only. For the purpose of this
documentation, qualified personnel is taken to mean people who fulfill the following
requirements:
● Through appropriate training and experience, they are able to recognize and avoid risks and
potential dangers in their particular field of activity.
● They have been instructed to carry out work on the machine by the appropriate person
responsible.
2.4 Safe handling
Workplace safety depends on the attentiveness, care, and common sense of the personnel
who install, operate, and maintain the machine. In addition to the safety measures cited, as a
matter of principle, the use of caution is necessary when you are near the machine. Always pay
attention to your safety.
Also observe the following to prevent accidents:
● General safety regulations applicable in the country where the machine is deployed.
● Manufacturer-specific and application-specific regulations
● Special agreements made with the operator
● Separate safety instructions supplied with the machine
● Safety symbols and instructions on the machine and its packaging
Danger as a result of stationary parts under voltage (live parts)
Live parts represent a hazard. Touch protection against active (live) parts is no longer
guaranteed if covers are removed. The minimum clearance and creepage distances may be
violated when coming close to live parts. Touching or coming close to them can result in death,
serious injury or material damage.
● Ensure that all live parts are suitably covered.
● Switch off and disconnect the machine first if you want to remove covers. Observe the "5
safety rules".
Risk of injury due to rotating parts
Rotating parts are dangerous. Touch protection against rotating parts is no longer guaranteed
if covers are removed. Touching rotating parts can result in death, serious injury or material
damage.
● Ensure that all rotating parts are reliably covered.
● Switch off and disconnect the machine first if you want to remove covers. Observe the "5
safety rules".
● Only remove covers when the rotating parts have come to a complete standstill.
Safety information
2.3 Qualified personnel
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
16 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Risk of burns due to hot surfaces
Individual machine parts can become hot in operation. Burns can result when coming into
contact with these parts.
● Never touch machine parts during operation.
● Allow the machine to cool before starting work on the machine.
● Check the temperature of parts before touching them. If required, wear suitable protective
equipment.
Health hazard due to chemical substances
Chemical substances required for the setup, operation and maintenance of machines can
present a health risk.
● Observe the product information provided by the manufacturer.
Flammable substances hazard
Chemical substances required for the setup, operation and maintenance of machines may be
flammable. These substances can ignite if handled incorrectly. They can cause burns and
property damage.
● Observe the product information provided by the manufacturer.
See also
The 5 safety rules (Page 15)
Noise emissions
During operation, the machine's noise emission levels can exceed those permitted at the
workplace, which can cause hearing damage.
● Ensure that nobody is in the area of increased noise emissions during machine operation.
● Take steps to reduce noise so that the machine can be operated safely within your system.
The following measures may help to reduce noise.
– Covers
– Noise insulation
– Hearing protection measures
Safety information
2.4 Safe handling
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 17
2.5 Electrostatic sensitive devices
Material damage due to electrostatic discharge
Electronic modules contain components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
These components can be damaged or destroyed if they are not handled correctly. To protect
equipment against damage, follow the instructions given below.
● Only touch electronic modules if you absolutely have to work on them.
● The body of the person concerned must have been electrostatically discharged and
grounded immediately before any electronic modules are touched.
● Electronic modules should not be brought into contact with electrically insulating materials,
such as:
– Plastic film
– Plastic parts
– Insulating table supports
– Clothing made of synthetic fibers
● Always place electrostatic sensitive devices on conductive bases.
● Always pack, store and transport electronic modules or components in conductive
packaging, such as:
– Metallized plastic or metal containers
– Conductive foam material
– Domestic aluminum foil
The necessary ESD protective measures for electrostatic sensitive devices are illustrated once
again in the following drawings:
6HDWLQJSRVLWLRQ6WDQGLQJSRVLWLRQ6WDQGLQJVHDWLQJSRVLWLRQEEDFDIIIIIDFFHGGHG
a = conductive floor surfaceb = ESD table c = ESD shoes
d = ESD overall e = ESD wristband f = cabinet ground connection
See also
Replacing the DRIVE-CLiQ interface (encoder module) (Page 130)
Safety information
2.5 Electrostatic sensitive devices
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
18 Operating Instructions 01/2019
2.6 Interference immunity
By selecting suitable signal cables and evaluation units, ensure that the interference immunity
of the machine is not diminished.
2.7 Interference voltages when operating the converter
Interference voltages when operating the converter
When a converter is in operation, the emitted interference varies in strength depending on the
converter (manufacturer, type, interference suppression measures undertaken). On machines
with integrated sensors (e.g. PTC thermistors), interference voltages caused by the converter
may occur on the sensor lead. This can cause faults which can result in eventual or immediate
death, serious injury or material damage.
● Comply with the EMC information provided by the manufacturer of the converter. This is how
you prevent the limit values stipulated by IEC/EN 61000-6-3 for the drive system (consisting
of the machine and converter) from being exceeded.
● You must put appropriate EMC measures in place.
2.8 Electromagnetic fields when operating electrical power engineering
installations
Electrical power equipment generate electromagnetic fields during operation. Potentially lethal
malfunctions can occur in medical implants, e.g. pacemakers, in the vicinity of electrical power
equipment. Data may be lost on magnetic or electronic data carriers.
● Protect the personnel working in the plant by taking appropriate measures, such as erecting
identifying markings, safety barriers and warning signs and giving safety talks.
● Observe the nationally applicable health and safety regulations.
● It is forbidden for people with pacemakers to be close to the machine.
● Do not carry any magnetic or electronic data media.
Safety information
2.6 Interference immunity
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 19
Safety information
2.8 Electromagnetic fields when operating electrical power engineering installations
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
20 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Description 3
Application range
The motors of the 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828. series are used as industrial drives. They have
been designed to address a wide range of drive applications exclusively fed from converters.
They are characterized by their high power density, ruggedness, long lifetime, and overall
reliability.
WARNING
Risk of explosion
This machine is not designed for use in hazardous areas. An explosion can occur if the
machine is operated in these areas. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Never operate this machine in hazardous areas.
Rating plate
The rating plate shows the identification data and the most important technical data. The data
on the rating plate and the contractual agreements define the limits of proper usage.
&2'(
,0
1R1
31N:
819
Q1PLQ7+&/+,1$QPD[PLQ6LHPHQV$*0DGHLQ*HUPDQ\'1¾UQEHUJ,(&(1FRV˳a0RW,3I1+]
Figure 3-1 Schematic layout of rating plate
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 21
Table 3-1 Elements on the rating plate
No. Description No. Description
010 MLFB 200 Rated current IN (3)
012 Consecutive number, part of serial number 210 Rated power PN (3)
020 Serial number * 220 cos φ (3)
025 UL approval 230 Rated frequency fN (3)
026 (empty) 240 Rated speed nN (3)
030 Type of construction 250 Operating mode (3)
035 (empty) 255 Code for operating point 3
036 (empty) 260 Rated voltage VN (4)
040 Degree of protection 261 Switching mode 4
045 Type of balancing 270 Rated current IN (4)
050 Rated voltage UN (1) 280 Rated power PN (4)
051 Connection type 1 290 cos φ (4)
060 Rated current IN (1) 300 Rated frequency fN (4)
070 Rated power PN (1) 310 Rated speed nN (4)
080 cos φ (1) 320 Operating mode (4)
090 Rated frequency fN (1) 325 Code for operating point 4
100 Rated speed nN (1) 330 Maximum current IMAX
110 Operating mode (1) 335 Weight
115 Code for operating point 1 340 Maximum torque MMAX
120 Rated voltage UN (2) 350 Maximum speed nMAX
121 Connection type 2 360 Temperature sensor
130 Rated current IN (2) 370 Tachometer/resolver
140 Rated power PN (2) 380 Cooling method
150 cos φ (2) 390 Throughput l/min (m3/s)
160 Rated frequency fN (2) 400 System pressure
170 Rated speed nN (2) 410 Maximum coolant temperature
180 Operating mode (2) 420 Options (I)
185 Code for operating point 2 430 Options (II)
190 Rated voltage UN (3) 440 Optional customer information
191 Connection type 3 450 Anti-condensation heater / place holder
* Based on the serial number, you can identify where the machine was manufactured and where you can
have your questions answered:
No:N... = Nuremberg
No.UC... = Frenstat
Rotor
This machine is an induction motor for low voltage with squirrel-cage induction motor and
integrated cooling circuit.
Description
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
22 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Machine design
The regulations and standards used as basis for designing and testing this machine are
stamped on the rating plate. The machine design basically complies with the subsequent
standards: Please refer to the EU Declaration of Conformity for the versions of the harmonized
standards referenced.
Table 3-2 Machine design
Feature Standard
Dimensions and operation characteristics IEC / EN 60034-1
Degree of protection IEC / EN 60034-5
Cooling IEC / EN 60034-6
Type of construction IEC / EN 60034-7
Terminal markings and direction of rotation IEC/EN 60034-8
Noise emission IEC / EN 60034-9
Mechanical vibrations IEC / EN 60034-14
IEC‑standard voltages IEC/DIN IEC 60038
Vibration limit values DIN ISO 10816-3
Relevant directives
The following directives are relevant for the SIMOTICS motor series.
European low-voltage directive
The SIMOTICS motor series complies with the requirements of the low-voltage directive
2014/35/EU.
European machinery directive
The SIMOTICS motor series does not fall within the area of validity of the machinery directive.
However, the use of the products in a typical machine application has been fully assessed for
compliance with the main regulations in this directive concerning health and safety.
European EMC Directive
The SIMOTICS motor series does not fall within the area of validity of the EMC directive. The
products are not considered as devices in the sense of the directive.
Eurasian conformity
The SIMOTICS motor series complies with the requirements of the Russia/Belarus/
Kazakhstan customs union (EAC).
China Compulsory Certification
The SIMOTICS motor series does not fall in the area of validity of the China Compulsory
Certification (CCC).
Description
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 23
Underwriters Laboratories
The SIMOTICS motor series generally complies with UL and cUL requirements as component
of motor applications - and is correspondingly listed. Specifically developed motors and
functions are the exceptions in this case. Here, it is important that you carefully observe the
contents of the quotation and that there is a cUL mark on the rating plate (nameplate)!
Quality management system
Siemens AG employs a quality management system that meets the requirements of ISO 9001
and ISO 14001.
Certificates that can be downloaded
You can download certificates for the SIMOTICS motor series at the following link:
Certificates (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/13358/cert)
Drive
The motor speed is controlled using a converter.
NOTICE
Destruction of the machine when operated directly from the line supply
The machine will be destroyed if it is directly connected to the line supply. Only operate the
machine using a converter.
Types of construction
The motor is supplied with two attached lifting eyes. The type construction can be found on the
rating plate.
Vertical type of construction
For IM V5 and IM V15 types of construction with "shaft extension pointing downward", the motor
is equipped with two additional Vario eye bolts. The Vario eyebolts are in the terminal box.
NOTICE
Protection against falling parts
For vertical types of construction, protect the air intake or discharge against falling parts, e.g.
by attaching a canopy. Otherwise the machine could be damaged.
Cooling water-cooled motors
Cooling circuit
The cooling circuit consists of an enclosed, internal air circulation, which is driven by the shaft-
mounted fans and stainless steel tubes that are directly integrated into the laminated stator
core; cooling type IC 71W according to IEC / EN 60034‑6.
Description
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
24 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Cooling capacity
To ensure adequate cooling of the motor, it is essential to adhere to the specified cooling water
rate, temperature and cooling water quality (Page 29).
Cooling with external fan
The machine has cooling method IC 416 in accordance with IEC / EN 60034-6. The separately
driven fan unit and the terminal box can be mounted in a different position depending on the
order.
WARNING
Improper use of the external fan
Improper use of the external fan can result in death, serious injury, and material damage.
● Observe and follow the operating instructions of the external fan.
See also
Additional documents (Page 167)
External fan
Different external fans are used depending on the shaft height and particular motor version:
Type Version External fan
1PH818.
1PH822.
Standard version EC external fan with single-phase EC motor
Version with option L75 External fan with three-phase motor
Version with option L76 EC external fan with three-phase EC motor
1PH828. Standard version External fan with three-phase EC motor
EC external fans with a fixed operating speed have been specifically designed for this motor
series.
Degree of protection
Depending on the version, the machine has degree of protection IP23 or IP55.
Supplementary devices
A temperature sensor is integrated in the stator winding to monitor the winding temperature.
The type of temperature sensor is specified on the rating plate.
Depending on the order options, various supplementary devices such as encoder systems can
be either installed or mounted.
Description
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 25
Holding brake
Depending on the order, a special version of a holding brake from the Stromag company is
mounted. Various types of holding brake are mounted depending on the shaft height.
NOTICE
Technical data for the special version of the holding brake
The following technical data applies to the special version of the mounted holding brake. The
corresponding data in the manufacturers operating instructions do not apply.
Table 3-3 Technical data of the holding brake
Technical data NFF-A 63
AH180
NFF-A 100
AH225
Braking torque MBrake [Nm] 1000 1600
Max. speed nBrake [rpm] 3500 3100
Weight incl. hollow shaft mbrake [kg] 63 88
Moment of inertia Jbrake [kgm2] 0,022 0,051
Total moment of inertia (emer‐
gency stop)
Jtotal [kgm2] 1,3 3,9
Rated voltage U [V] 230 V (AC) 230 V (AC)
Permitted single switched energy P [W] 98 210
Coil current I [A] 2,21 2,70
Number of emergency stops Z - 2100 1200
Opening time [ms] 300 300
Closing time [ms] 80 100
Note
More information
● Commissioning (Page 87)
See also
Operating instructions, holding brake (Page 169)
Ambient conditions
The standard machines are not suitable for use in corrosive atmospheres, atmospheres with a
high salt content, or outdoor applications.
Description
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
26 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Roller bearings
The machines are equipped with different types of roller bearings depending on the version and
the operating conditions described in the order. If the machine is equipped with a regreasing
system, you will find the relevant data on the machine's lubricant plate.
The following standard roller bearing versions are available:
Table 3-4 Roller bearing versions
Design Bearings
Standard design and "Performance" Drive end deep-groove ball bearing as spring-loaded floating
bearing
Non-drive end deep-groove ball bearing as fixed bearing
Version for increased radial forces Drive end cylindrical-roller bearing as floating bearing
Non-drive end deep-groove ball bearing as fixed bearing
Paint finish
The machine is painted according to the instructions in your order.
Description
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 27
Description
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
28 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Preparations for use 4
Good planning and preparation of machine applications are essential in terms of keeping
installation simple and avoiding errors, ensuring safe operation, and allowing access to the
machine for servicing and corrective maintenance.
This chapter outlines what you need to consider when configuring your plant in relation to this
machine and the preparations you need to make before the machine is delivered.
4.1 Safety-related aspects to consider when configuring the plant
A number of residual risks are associated with the machine. These are described in the chapter
titled "Safety information" (Page 15) and in related sections.
Take appropriate safety precautions (covers, barriers, markings, etc.) to ensure the machine is
operated safely within your plant.
4.2 Observing the operating mode
Observe the machine's operating mode. Use a suitable control system to prevent overspeeds,
thus protecting the machine from damage.
4.3 Cooling water quality for water-cooled motors
The values specified for the cooling water correspond to the requirements for a closed cooling
circuit. Not all of the specified concentrations will occur in the cooling water at the same time.
A filter can be used to ensure smooth operation; the grade of filtration should not exceed
100 μm.
Cooling water specification
Table 4-1 Cooling water specification
Constituent Value
pH value 6.0 … 9.0
Total hardness < 170 ppm
Conductivity < 500 μS/cm
Chloride ions < 40 ppm
Sulfate ions < 50 ppm
Nitrate ions < 50 ppm
Dissolved solids < 340 ppm
Max. grain size < 100 μm
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 29
Constituent Value
Operating pressure 6 bar max.
Inlet temperature < 30°C
Minimum cooling water inlet temperature Tcooling water > Tambient - 5 K
Anti-freeze protection / corrosion protection 20 … 30 %
Inhibitor NALCO 00GE056 0.2 … 0,25 %
Cooling water intake temperature
The maximum cooling water intake temperature is 30 °C.
NOTICE
Condensation for an excessively low cooling water intake temperature
If the temperature difference between cooling water and ambient temperature is greater than
5 K, this may result in condensation forming in the machine. This results in material damage.
● Make sure that the condensation can drain away freely.
● Adopt appropriate measures to achieve the required intake temperature of the cooling
water.
● Alternatively, dry the ambient air.
4.4 Ensuring cooling
Note
Note also the technical data on the rating plates on the motor enclosure.
Preparations for use
4.4 Ensuring cooling
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
30 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Preconditions for adequate cooling
● For motors that are cooled by the ambient air, the cooling air must be able to flow unimpeded
to and from the motors. Hot discharged air should not be drawn in again.
NOTICE
Overheating
If the required cooling air flow cannot be maintained, the machine can overheat. This can
result in material damage.
● Maintain the required minimum clearance for customer-supplied mounted accessories
at the air intake opening and at the air discharge openings to ensure the required
cooling air flow.
● Comply with the conditions of the IP degree of protection.
More stringent requirements regarding the IP degree of protection may necessitate the
installation of suitable filters and special arrangement of the intake and outlet openings.
● Equipment and cables must be connected without strain.
Figure 4-1 Air guidance from the DE to the NDE (schematic representation, types 1PH818. and
1PH822.)
A bypass is available for 1PH822. with IP23 degree of protection and air guidance from the DE
to the NDE.
Preparations for use
4.4 Ensuring cooling
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 31
Figure 4-2 Bypass for 1PH822. for IP23
Figure 4-3 Air guidance from the NDE to the DE (schematic representation, type 1PH828.) for IP55
External fan
The code for the external fan is at the eleventh position of the order number. The order number
– and therefore the installed external fan type – is specified on the rating plate.
Machines with pipe connection
You must mount and connect pipes and a fan of suitable type and dimensioning to machines
that are intended for the connection of pipes and/or for operation with an external fan.
Please observe the following when connecting pipes:
● Additional pressure drop in the system.
● Shipping covers on the ventilation openings must have been removed.
Preparations for use
4.4 Ensuring cooling
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
32 Operating Instructions 01/2019
For machines with a pipe connection, the potential pressure drop inside the machine is given
in the following table:
Table 4-2 Pressure drop in motors with pipe connection
Type Degree of pro‐
tection
Volume flow Pressure drop Flow resistance
1PH818. IP23 0.21 m3/s 450 Pa 10204 Ns2/m8
IP55 0.17 m3/s 550 Pa 19030 Ns2/m8
1PH822. IP23 0.33 m3/s 600 Pa 5510 Ns2/m8
IP55 0.31 m3/s 650 Pa 6760 Ns2/m8
1PH828. IP23 0.52 m3/s 600 Pa 2220 Ns2/m8
IP55 0.42 m3/s 600 Pa 3400 Ns2/m8
4.5 Interlock circuit for the external fan
Interlock circuit for the external fan motor
For machines with external fans, install an interlock circuit that prevents the main machine
being switched on if the external fan is not operational.
Force-ventilated 1PH818. and 1PH822. motors are equipped with electronically commutated
motors (EC motor).
The electronics of the external fan equipped with EC motor can be damaged as a result of
voltage fluctuations. Supply the external fan with power from the line supply and not via a
frequency converter.
4.6 Interlock circuit for anti-condensation heating (option)
If the anti-condensation heating is operated while the machine is running, this can increase the
temperatures inside the machine.
● Install an interlock circuit that switches off the anti-condensation heating once the main
machine is switched on.
● Only switch on the anti-condensation heating after the machine has been switched off.
See also
Switching on the machine (Page 98)
Preparations for use
4.5 Interlock circuit for the external fan
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 33
4.7 Thermal motor protection
The machine is equipped as standard with a temperature sensor, optionally with PTC
thermistors to directly monitor the motor temperature in order to protect the machine against
overload in operation. Plan a corresponding circuit for monitoring.
See also
Connecting the temperature sensor (Page 83)
4.8 Overheating during periodic duty
NOTICE
Non-periodic duty
In all of the operating modes, always operate the external fan according to DIN EN 60034-1.
For non-periodic operation, it is possible that the machine is thermally overloaded. This can
result in damage to the machine.
● In the case of extended non-operational periods, the fan should be in operation until the
machine has approximately reached the temperature of the coolant, see S2 duty type in
DIN EN 60034‑1.
● Use a suitable circuit to ensure that the external fan is appropriately operated.
NOTICE
EC fan control via an input signal
The fan motor can overheat if the external EC fan is operated at low fan speeds as a result of
the setpoint signal it receives.
● Monitor the motor using the integrated temperature sensors.
● Integrate the temperature monitoring into the interlocking circuit.
Preparations for use
4.7 Thermal motor protection
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
34 Operating Instructions 01/2019
4.9 Noise emissions
Noise emissions
During operation, the machine's noise emission levels can exceed those permitted at the
workplace, which can cause hearing damage.
● Ensure that nobody is in the area of increased noise emissions during machine operation.
● Take steps to reduce noise so that the machine can be operated safely within your system.
The following measures may help to reduce noise.
– Covers
– Noise insulation
– Hearing protection measures
4.10 Rotational speed limit values
Excessive rotational speed can lead to serious damage to the machine. This can result in
death, serious injury, or material damage.
● Avoid operation above the permissible speed by using the appropriate control function.
● Observe the speeds stamped on the rating plate.
4.11 System-inherent frequencies
Excessively high vibration levels and system resonances can damage the machine set.
● Configure and match the system consisting of the foundation and machine set in such a way
that no system resonances can arise and result in the permissible vibration levels being
exceeded.
● The vibration values according to DIN ISO 10816-3 must not be exceeded.
4.12 Torsional loading of the drive train due to faults in the electrical supply
In the event of faults in the electrical connection during operation, excessive air gap torques can
lead to additional mechanical torsional load on the line shaft.
Risk of torsional stress on the drive train
If the configuration does not correctly recognize the mechanical torsional loadings of the shaft
assembly, this can lead to serious damage to the machine. This can result in death, serious
injury or material damage.
● When planning the system, consider the configuration data. The system planner is
responsible for the entire drive train.
Preparations for use
4.9 Noise emissions
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 35
4.13 Transport and storage
When carrying out any work on the machine, observe the general safety instructions (Page 15)
and the specifications contained in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical
equipment.
4.13.1 Checking the delivery
Checking the delivery for completeness
The drive systems are put together on an individual basis. When you take receipt of the
delivery, please check immediately whether the items delivered are in accordance with the
accompanying documents. Siemens will not accept any claims relating to items missing from
the delivery and which are submitted at a later date.
● Report any apparent transport damage to the delivery agent immediately. Never
commission a damaged motor.
● Report any apparent defects/missing components to the appropriate Siemens office
immediately.
These safety instructions are part of the scope of supply; keep them in a location where they
can be easily accessed.
4.13.2 Lifting and transportation
To safely lift and transport the machine, the following requirements must be met:
● Personnel operating cranes and fork-lift trucks must be appropriately qualified.
● If the motor is packed, depending on the weight, size and on-site conditions, lift crates and
transport frames using a fork-lift truck or a crane with slings. Use a crane or fork-lift truck
suitable for the load.
● When lifting the machine, use only approved and undamaged sling guides and spreaders
of sufficient rated capacity. Check the lifting equipment prior to its use. The weight of the
machine is shown on the rating plate.
● When lifting the machine, refer to the information on the lifting plate.
– Comply with the specified spreading angles.
– Do not exceed the maximum lifting acceleration and lifting speed specified on the lifting
plate. Lift the machine without jerking it.
Acceleration a ≤ 0.4 g (≈ 4 m/s2 )
Velocity v ≤ 20 m/min
● Use only the load carrying device on the stator frame for lifting.
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
36 Operating Instructions 01/2019
WARNING
Transport for a different type of construction
If you do not transport or lift the machine in a position appropriate for its construction, the
machine can tip, slip into the lifting equipment or fall down. This can result in death, serious
injury or material damage.
● Use only the load carrying device on the stator frame for lifting.
● Use the load carrying device appropriate for the machine position.
● Use suitable rope guiding or spreading devices. The weight of the machine is shown on the
rating plate.
WARNING
Transport if the center of gravity is not at the center.
If the center of gravity of a load is not located centrally between the attachment points, the
motor can tip over or slip out of the lifting equipment and fall when it is being transported or
lifted. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Comply with the handling instructions on the machine when transporting it.
● Be aware of the possibility of different loads on the sling ropes or lifting straps and the
carrying capacity of the lifting equipment.
● Always take account of the center of gravity when transporting or lifting the motor. If the
center of gravity is not located centrally between the attachment points, then position the
hoisting hook above the center of gravity.
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 37
There are two lifting eyebolts for horizontal transport of the motor. Always transport and lift the
motor by the lifting eyebolts.
● Only lift the motor at the lifting eyebolts on the bearing end shields. To hoist the motor, in
particular if there are built-on assemblies, use suitable cable-guidance or spreading
equipment.
NOTICE
Damage to the terminal box
The terminal box can be damaged when lifting without using suitable spreading
equipment,.
Only lift the machine using suitable spreading equipment.
● Pay attention to the lifting capacity of the hoisting gear. The weight of the motor is specified
on the rating plate.
Figure 4-4 Lifting the machine (schematic representation)
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
38 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Rotor shipping brace
Machines ordered with the "Increased radial force" option are equipped with cylindrical-roller
bearings and a rotor shipping brace.
NOTICE
Transport damage if the rotor shipping brace device is not used.
The motor can be damaged if it is jolted during transport. This can result in material damage.
● Always transport the motor with the rotor shipping brace supplied. The rotor shipping brace
must be attached during transportation.
● Only remove it before pushing on the drive element.
● If you transport the machine after the output transmission element has been pulled on, then
you must axially fix the rotor in another way.
ཱ
①Sleeve
②Shaft screw
Figure 4-5 Rotor shipping brace
Table 4-3 Tightening torque and preloading force for axially fixing the rotor
Type Thread in the shaft end Tightening torque Preload
1PH818. M20 50 Nm 12 kN
1PH822. M20 50 Nm 12 kN
1PH828. M24 100 Nm 20 kN
WARNING
Lifting using the cooling water pipes
The cooling water pipe system has not been designed so that it can be used to lift the motor.
The machine can fall when lifted. Death, serious injury, or material damage will result.
● Only use the eyebolts on the bearing shields to transport and lift the motor.
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 39
Lifting force-ventilated motors in type of construction IM V5 with side-mounted terminal boxes
Proceed as follows if you wish to lift a machine with type of construction IM V5 and with side-
mounted terminal box:
1. Screw off the external fan.
2. Screw in the eyebolts supplied and use these to lift the machine.
3. Screw on the external fan again after the work has been completed.
4.13.3 Transporting a force-ventilated motor that has already been in operation
If you have already operated the motor and now want to transport it, proceed as follows:
1. Allow the motor to cool down.
2. Remove the connections provided by the customer.
3. Fit the rotor shipping brace.
4. Only use the eyebolts on the bearing shields to transport and lift the motor.
4.13.4 Transporting a water-cooled motor that has already been in operation
If you have already operated the motor and now want to transport it, proceed as follows:
1. Allow the motor to cool down.
2. Remove the connections provided by the customer.
3. Drain the cooling-water system and purge it carefully with air.
4. Fit the rotor shipping brace, if present.
5. Only use the eyebolts on the bearing shields - for example - to transport and lift the motor.
Note
Store the rotor locking device
Be sure to store the rotor locking device. It must be remounted for possible disassembly and
transport.
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
40 Operating Instructions 01/2019
4.13.5 Transporting the machine set
WARNING
Falling down of the machine
The lifting lugs on the machine are designed only for the weight of the machine. If a machine
set is lifted and transported on a single machine, this can lead to mechanical failure of the
lifting lug. The machine or machine set may fall. This can result in death, serious injury or
material damage.
● Do not lift machine sets by attaching lifting tackle to the individual machines.
● Use only the equipment provided, e.g. the openings or lugs on the base plates, for
transporting machine sets. Note the maximum capacity of the lifting lug.
Note
Place the machine in a secure and raised position
In order to obtain easy and safe access to the underside of the machine, place it in a secure and
raised position.
DANGER
Standing under suspended loads
If the lifting gear or load handling attachments were to fail, the machine could fall. This can
result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Never remain under or in the immediate vicinity of the machine when it is raised.
4.13.6 Storage
You can store the machine for up to two years in dry, dust-free and vibration-free rooms without
reducing the specified storage time.
NOTICE
Seizure damage to bearings
If the motor is stored incorrectly, bearing damage can occur at standstill, e.g. brinelling, as a
result of vibration or shock.
Read the following storage instructions.
Preparation
● Fit the rotor shipping brace.
● Apply a preserving agent, for example to external components such as shaft ends, if this has
not already been applied in the factory.
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 41
Storing indoors
NOTICE
Damage caused as a result of outdoor storage
Storing the machine outdoors can result in it being damaged.
● Ensure that the machine is only stored in areas that comply with the following conditions.
● Store the motor in an area that meets the following criteria:
– The room must be dry, dust-free, frost-free and vibration-free. The relative humidity of
the air should be less than 60%. The temperature should not drop below ‑15 °C in
accordance with EN 60034-1.
– The room must be well ventilated.
– The room must provide protection against extreme weather conditions.
– The air in the room must not contain any harmful gases.
● Protect the motor from shocks and humidity.
● Cover the motor properly.
● Avoid contact corrosion:
– Every three months, remove the shipping brace. Rotate the shaft extension by hand.
– Then reattach the rotor shipping brace.
Protection against humidity
● If a dry storage area is not available, then take the following precautions:
– Wrap the machine in a material that absorbs moisture. Then pack the machine in an
airtight film.
– Include several bags of desiccant in the seal-tight packaging. Check the desiccant and
replace as required.
– Place a humidity meter in the airtight packaging that indicates the level of humidity inside
it.
– Inspect the motor regularly.
See also
Protect the cooling water system of water-cooled motors (Page 44)
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
42 Operating Instructions 01/2019
4.13.7 Attaching the rotor shipping brace prior to storage
NOTICE
Bearing damage caused by vibration
If storage conditions are inappropriate there is a risk of bearing seizure damage. This can
result in material damage, such as damage to bearings caused by vibration.
● On machines that have been supplied with a rotor shipping brace, secure the rotor as per
the notes on transportation.
● Protect the machine against strong radial vibrations, since the rotor shipping brace might
not absorb these completely.
NOTICE
Bearing damage when being transported
If the customer has already mounted parts, for example coupling, belt pulley, etc., the bearing
can be damaged during transport.
● In this case, make sure that the customer uses a rotor shipping brace.
Long-term storage
If you are storing a machine for more than six months, you must check its condition every six
months.
● Check the machine for damage.
● Carry out any necessary maintenance work.
● Document all preservation measures taken so that they can be reversed before the
machines are put back into service.
● Provide air-conditioning for the storage room.
Condensation
The following factors result in condensation in the machine:
● Significant fluctuations of the ambient temperature
● Direct sunshine
● Direct exposure to the weather
● High air humidity during storage
● Intermittent operation or load fluctuations in operation
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 43
Water drain holes (option L12)
Depending on the specific order, water drainage holes are provided in the bearing shields at the
DE and NDE in the foot area and opposite the regreasing system. Make sure that the
condensation can always drain away freely.
● Shaft heights 180 and 225: The plug that has been inserted into the water drainage holes
allows the condensation to drain away. Do not remove the plug, otherwise the machine's
degree of protection will be affected.
● Shaft height 280: There are no plugs in the water drain holes. The water must be able to
drain away freely.
The water drain holes only function when the motor is mounted horizontally for types of
construction IM B3, IM B35 and IM B5.
NOTICE
Damage due to condensation
If the stator winding is damp, its insulation resistance is reduced. This can result in voltage
flashovers, which can destroy the winding. Condensation can cause rusting inside the
machine.
● Make sure that the condensation can always drain away freely.
4.13.8 Protect the cooling water system of water-cooled motors
When the units are delivered, the high-grade steel cooling-water pipe system is not filled with
cooling water.
● When you put the motor into storage after use, drain the cooling water ducts and purge with
air to ensure that they are completely empty.
● For operation, add a maximum of 20 % to 30 % of an anti-freeze agent to the cooling water;
use Antrifrogen N or Tyfocor, for example, as the anti-freeze.
NOTICE
Frost damage to the cooling circuit
Damage may be caused to the cooling circuit if the cooling water freezes.
If the ambient temperature falls below 0 °C during operation add anti-freeze to the cooling
water.
Preparations for use
4.13 Transport and storage
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
44 Operating Instructions 01/2019
4.13.9 Protection against corrosion
If the machine is stored in dry conditions, then apply the subsequently listed anti-corrosion
measures:
● Storage up to six months:
Apply a coat of corrosion protective compound to all accessible bare metal parts such as the
exposed shaft extension, flange or machine feet.
● Storage for longer than six months:
Apply a coat of long-term anti-corrosion agent to all accessible bare parts.
● Inspect the machine regularly and if necessary, apply an additional coating of corrosion
protection.
Document all preservation measures taken so that they can be reversed before the machines
are put back into service.
4.14 Converter operation
4.14.1 Connecting to a converter
Selecting and connecting the cable
● Use Motion Connect cables or symmetrically constructed, shielded cables to connect the
motor to a converter. The cable shielding, made up of as many strands as possible, must
have good electrical conductivity. Braided shields made of copper or aluminum are well
suited.
● The shield is connected at both ends, at the motor and converter. Keep unshielded cable
ends as short as possible.
● In order to ensure that high-frequency currents are efficiently discharged, provide a 360°
contact through a large surface area at the converter and at the motor. Use for instance,
EMC glands at the cable entries.
Preparations for use
4.14 Converter operation
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 45
Measures to reduce bearing currents
To specifically reduce and prevent damage caused by bearing currents, consider the system
as a whole, which comprises the motor, converter, and driven machine. The following
precautions help to prevent bearing currents:
● Setting up a properly meshed grounding system in the system as a whole, with low
impedance for high-frequency currents
● No potential difference between the motor, converter, and working machine.
– Use symmetrical, shielded connecting cables.
– Connect the cable shield at both ends over the greatest possible surface area (360°
contact).
– Use equipotential bonding conductors between the motor and the driven machine as
well as between the motor and the converter
● Limit the voltage rate of rise by using an output filter to dampen harmonic components in the
output voltage
4.14.2 Converter input voltage
The insulation system of SIMOTICS machines always complies with the requirements of stress
category C (IVIC C = high stress). If voltage peaks higher than those specified according to
IVIC C can occur, then please contact your Siemens partner:
● For a line supply voltage (converter input voltage) up to max. 480 V, and when controlled
from a SINAMICS G/SINAMICS S converter with uncontrolled/controlled infeed: Comply
with the guidelines for configuring motor and converter.
● For line voltages (converter input voltages) higher than 480 V, motors, which are ordered for
converter operation, have an appropriate insulation system.
● Operation with a converter from another manufacturer: Comply with the permissible voltage
peaks according to IEC 60034-18-41 in accordance with stress category C, dependent on
the particular line voltage (converter input voltage) and the motor insulation system.
NOTICE
Material damage caused by an excessively high supply voltage
The insulation system will be damaged if the supply voltage is too high for the insulation
system. This can completely destroy the machine.
● Comply with the peak voltages as laid down in the guidelines above.
4.14.3 Insulated bearings for converter operation
If the machine is operated with a low-voltage converter such as SINAMICS G150 / S150 / S120,
then an insulated bearing and a speed encoder with insulated bearings (option) is mounted at
the non-drive end.
Preparations for use
4.14 Converter operation
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
46 Operating Instructions 01/2019
For 1PH818, the insulated bearings are optional; for 1PH822 and 1PH828, insulated bearings
are standard.
Comply with the plates on the machine relating to bearing insulation and possible bridges.
①Driven machine ④Insulated bearings
②Motor ⑤Insulated tachometer fitting
③Coupling
Figure 4-6 Schematic representation of a single drive
NOTICE
Bearing damage
The bearing insulation must not be bridged. Bearing currents can damage bearings.
● Also when performing subsequent installation work, e.g. installing an automatic lubrication
system or a non-insulated vibration sensor, ensure the bearing insulation is not bridged.
● Contact your Service Center, if necessary.
See also
Service and Support (Page 161)
Preparations for use
4.14 Converter operation
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 47
Preparations for use
4.14 Converter operation
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
48 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Mounting 5
5.1 Safety instructions for mounting
Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine:
● Comply with the general safety instructions.
● Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations.
● When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid
down in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment.
See also
Safety information (Page 15)
Injury and material damage caused by inappropriate fastening material
If screws of an incorrect property class have been selected or if they have been fastened to an
incorrect tightening torque, they may break or become loose. This will cause the machine to
move, which could damage the bearings. The rotor could smash into the machine enclosure
and machine parts could be flung out of place. This can result in death, serious injury or material
damage.
● Comply with the required property classes for screwed connections.
● Tighten the screwed connections to the specified tightening torques.
Injury and material damage caused by incorrect machine alignment
If the machine has not been properly aligned, this will mean the fastening parts are subjected
to stress/distortion. Screws may become loose or break, the machine will move, machine parts
could be flung out of place. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Carefully align the machine to the driven machine.
Material damage caused by improper handling
Mounting parts such as temperature sensors or speed sensors are attached to the machine
and could be ripped off or destroyed as a result of improper handling. This could lead to
machine malfunctions, extending even to total loss of the machine.
● Where necessary, use suitable steps when performing installation work on the machine.
● Do not stand on cables or attachments during installation. Do not use attachments as steps.
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 49
Damage to mounted parts and components as a result of high temperatures
The motor components get very hot during operation. High temperatures can damage parts
mounted by customers, such as cables manufactured out of materials that are not heat
resistant.
● Temperature-sensitive parts must not come into contact with or be attached to components
mounted on the machine.
● Only use heat-resistant mounting parts. The connecting cables and cable entries must be
suitable for the particular application.
Loss of conformity with European directives
In the delivery state, the machine corresponds to the requirements of the European directives.
Unauthorized changes or modifications to the machine lead to the loss of conformity with
European Directives and the loss of the associated warranty.
5.2 Preparing for installation
5.2.1 Requirements for installation
The following requirements must be satisfied prior to starting installation work:
● Staff have access to the operating and installation instructions.
● The machine is unpacked and ready for mounting at the installation location.
● Measure the insulation resistance of the winding before starting any installation work. If the
insulation resistance lies below the specified value, take appropriate remedial measures.
These remedial measures may necessitate the machine being removed again and
transported.
5.2.2 Insulation resistance and polarization index
Measuring the insulation resistance and polarization index (PI) provides information on the
condition of the machine. It is therefore important to check the insulation resistance and the
polarization index at the following times:
● Before starting up a machine for the first time
● After an extended period in storage or downtime
● Within the scope of maintenance work
The following information is provided regarding the state of the winding insulation:
● Is the winding head insulation conductively contaminated?
● Has the winding insulation absorbed moisture?
Mounting
5.2 Preparing for installation
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
50 Operating Instructions 01/2019
As such, you can determine whether the machine needs commissioning or any necessary
measures such as cleaning and/or drying the winding:
● Can the machine be put into operation?
● Must the windings be cleaned or dried?
Detailed information on testing and the limit values can be found here:
"Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index" (Page 51)
5.2.3 Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index
WARNING
Hazardous voltage at the terminals
During and immediately after measuring the insulation resistance or the polarization index (PI)
of the stator winding, hazardous voltages may be present at some of the terminals. Contact
with these can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● If any power cables are connected, check to make sure line supply voltage cannot be
delivered.
● Discharge the winding after measurement until the risk is eliminated, e.g. using the
following measures:
– Connect the terminals with the ground potential until the recharge voltage drops to a
non-hazardous level
– Attach the connection cable.
Measure the insulation resistance
1. Before you begin measuring the insulation resistance, please read the operating manual for
the insulation resistance meter you are going to use.
2. Short-circuit the ends of the temperature sensor cables before applying the test voltage. If
the test voltage is connected to only one temperature sensor terminal, the temperature
sensor will be destroyed.
3. Make sure that no power cables are connected.
4. Measure the winding temperature and the insulation resistance of the winding in relation to
the machine enclosure. The winding temperature should not exceed 40° C during the
measurement. Convert the measured insulation resistances in accordance with the formula
to the reference temperature of 40° C. This thereby ensures that the minimum values
specified can be compared.
5. Read out the insulation resistance one minute after applying the measuring voltage.
Mounting
5.2 Preparing for installation
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 51
Limit values for the stator winding insulation resistance
The following table specifies the measuring voltage and limit values for the insulation
resistance. These values correspond to IEEE 43‑2000 recommendations.
Table 5-1 Stator winding insulation resistance at 40° C
U
N
V
U
meas
V
R
C
MΩ
U ≤ 1000 500 ≥ 5
1000 ≤ U ≤ 2500 500 (max. 1000) 100
2500 < U ≤ 5000 1000 (max. 2500)
5000 < U ≤ 12000 2500 (max. 5000)
U > 12000 5000 (max. 10000)
U
rated = rated voltage, see the rating plate
U
meas = DC measuring voltage
R
C = minimum insulation resistance at a reference temperature of 40 °C
Conversion to the reference temperature
When measuring with winding temperatures other than 40° C, convert the measuring value to
the reference temperature of 40° C according to the following equations from IEEE 43-2000.
(1)
R
C =
K
T ·
R
T
R
CInsulation resistance converted to 40° C reference temperature
K
TTemperature coefficient according to equation (2)
R
TMeasured insulation resistance for measuring/winding temperature
T
in °C
(2)
K
T = (0.5) (40-T)/10
40 Reference temperature in °C
10 Halving/doubling of the insulation resistance with 10 K
T
Measuring/winding temperature in °C
In this case, doubling or halving the insulation resistance at a temperature change of 10 K is
used as the basis.
● The insulation resistance halves every time the temperature rises by 10 K.
● The resistance doubles every time the temperature falls by 10 K.
Mounting
5.2 Preparing for installation
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
52 Operating Instructions 01/2019
For a winding temperature of approx. 25° C, the minimum insulation resistances are 20 MΩ
(U ≤ 1000 V) or 300 MΩ (U > 1000 V). The values apply for the complete winding to ground.
Twice the minimum values apply to the measurement of individual assemblies.
● Dry, new windings have an insulation resistance of between 100 and 2000 MΩ, or possibly
even higher values. An insulation resistance value close to the minimum value could be due
to moisture and/or dirt accumulation. The size of the winding, the rated voltage and other
characteristics affect the insulation resistance and may need to be taken into account when
determining measures.
● Over its operating lifetime, the motor winding insulation resistance can drop due to ambient
and operational influences. Calculate the critical insulation resistance value depending on
the rated voltage by multiplying the rated voltage (kV) by the specific critical resistance
value. Convert the value for the current winding temperature at the time of measurement,
see above table.
Measuring the polarization index
1. To determine the polarization index, measure the insulation resistances after one minute
and ten minutes.
2. Express the measured values as a ratio:
PI =
R
insul 10 min /
R
insul 1 min
Many measuring devices display these values automatically following the measurement.
For insulation resistances > 5000 MΩ, the measurement of the PI is no longer meaningful and
consequently not included in the assessment.
R(10 min) / R(1 min) Assessment
≥ 2 Insulation in good condition
< 2 Dependent on the complete diagnosis of the insulation
NOTICE
Damage to insulation
If the critical insulation resistance is reached or undershot, this can damage the insulation and
cause voltage flashovers.
● Contact the service center (Page 161).
● If the measured value is close to the critical value, you must subsequently check the
insulation resistance at shorter intervals.
Limit values of the anti-condensation heating insulation resistance
The insulation resistance of the anti-condensation heating with respect to the machine housing
should not be lower than 1 MΩ when measured at 500 V DC.
Mounting
5.2 Preparing for installation
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 53
5.2.4 Prepare the mounting surfaces (IM B3)
● Ensure that the foundation faces are flat and clean.
● Check the dimensions of the mounting-foot holes.
5.2.5 Prepare the mounting surfaces (flange mounting)
● Clean the flange before installation, and make sure that the flange face is flat and free of
contaminations.
● Check the geometry of the flange.
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it
5.3.1 Preconditions for correct alignment and secure attachment
Detailed specialist knowledge of the following measures is required in order to correctly align
and securely fit the equipment.
● Preparing the foundation
● Selecting and mounting the coupling
● Measuring the concentricity and axial eccentricity tolerances
● Positioning the machine
If you are not familiar with the prescribed measures and procedures, then you can make use of
the services offered by the local Service Center (Page 161).
5.3.2 Checking the load handling attachments
Inspect the load handling attachments such as the load stands, lifting eyes and ring bolts and
also the lifting gear, before lifting the machine:
● Inspect the load handling attachments on the machine for possible damage. Replace any
load handling attachments that are found to be damaged.
● Check before use that the load handling attachments are correctly secured.
● When lifting the machine, use only approved and undamaged lifting gear of sufficient rated
capacity. Check these before using them.
WARNING
The machine can be dropped
If the load handling attachments and lifting gear are damaged or not correctly secured, the
machine may be dropped during lifting. This can result in death, serious injury or material
damage. Inspect the load handling attachments and lifting gear before use.
Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
54 Operating Instructions 01/2019
5.3.3 Removing anti-corrosion protection
Machined, bare metallic surfaces of the motor, such as the shaft end, fitted key, foot and flange
surfaces, are treated with an anti-corrosion agent.
1. Remove this layer of anti-corrosion agent from the mounting surfaces of the motor by wiping
it away with an absorbent cloth or paper sheet.
NOTICE
Damage to the machine surface
Using metal objects such as scrapers, spatulas, or plates to remove the anti-corrosion
protection could result in damage to the surfaces of the machine parts.
2. Then lightly oil the bare surfaces again.
5.3.4 Mounting the output elements
Type of balancing
The rotor is dynamically balanced. For shaft extensions with featherkeys, the balancing type is
specified using the following coding on the face of the drive end of the shaft:
H Balancing with half a feather key
F Balancing with a full feather key
N Balancing with a plain shaft - no keyway
Figure 5-1 Balancing type on the drive-end side
Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 55
Pushing on the power output elements
Preconditions
● The coupling and/or the output element must be appropriately dimensioned for the
operating case at hand.
Observe the coupling manufacturer's instructions.
● Make sure that the balancing type of the transmission element correctly matches the type
of balance of the rotor.
● Use only ready drilled and balanced transmission elements. Check the hole diameters and
the balancing status before pulling them on. Thoroughly clean the shaft extension.
Fitting
● Warm up the transmission elements to expand them before pulling them on. Select the
temperature difference for the heating process to suit the coupling diameter, fit and material.
Observe the coupling manufacturer's instructions.
● Power output elements may only be pushed on or pulled off with the correct equipment. The
output element must be pulled on in one continuous operation via the front thread holes in
the shaft or pulled on by hand.
● Do not strike it with a hammer, as this would damage the bearings.
Shaft extensions with feather key
To maintain the balancing quality, you have the following options:
● If the output element is shorter than the feather key for balancing type "H": Machine off the
section of feather key protruding from the shaft contour and output element in order to
maintain the balance quality.
● If the output element is mounted up to the shaft shoulder for motors with full-key balancing
"F", or if the output element is longer than the motor shaft extension: When balancing the
coupling or the belt pulley, take into account that the feather key does not take up all of the
hub groove.
Danger when feather keys are flung out
The feather key is only secured to prevent it falling out during transport. The feather key may
be flung out if the motor is operated without fitted transmission elements, such as coupling, etc.
This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Only operate the motor with the transmission element pulled on.
● For test operation or when commissioning without transmission element, carefully secure
the feather key using a suitable locking element. When doing this, take into account the type
of machine balancing.
Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
56 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Note
Type of balancing
In the case of shaft extensions with feather keys, the type of balancing is also included on the
rating plate next to the CE mark.
5.3.5 Lifting and transporting the machine
To safely lift and transport the machine, the following requirements must be met:
● Personnel operating cranes and fork-lift trucks must be appropriately qualified.
● If the motor is packed, depending on the weight, size and on-site conditions, lift crates and
transport frames using a fork-lift truck or a crane with slings. Use a crane or fork-lift truck
suitable for the load.
● When lifting the machine, use only approved and undamaged sling guides and spreaders
of sufficient rated capacity. Check the lifting equipment prior to its use. The weight of the
machine is shown on the rating plate.
● When lifting the machine, refer to the information on the lifting plate.
– Comply with the specified spreading angles.
– Do not exceed the maximum lifting acceleration and lifting speed specified on the lifting
plate. Lift the machine without jerking it.
Acceleration a ≤ 0.4 g (≈ 4 m/s2 )
Velocity v ≤ 20 m/min
● Use only the load carrying device on the stator frame for lifting.
WARNING
Transport for a different type of construction
If you do not transport or lift the machine in a position appropriate for its construction, the
machine can tip, slip into the lifting equipment or fall down. This can result in death, serious
injury or material damage.
● Use only the load carrying device on the stator frame for lifting.
● Use the load carrying device appropriate for the machine position.
● Use suitable rope guiding or spreading devices. The weight of the machine is shown on the
rating plate.
Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 57
WARNING
Transport if the center of gravity is not at the center.
If the center of gravity of a load is not located centrally between the attachment points, the
motor can tip over or slip out of the lifting equipment and fall when it is being transported or
lifted. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Comply with the handling instructions on the machine when transporting it.
● Be aware of the possibility of different loads on the sling ropes or lifting straps and the
carrying capacity of the lifting equipment.
● Always take account of the center of gravity when transporting or lifting the motor. If the
center of gravity is not located centrally between the attachment points, then position the
hoisting hook above the center of gravity.
Note
Place the machine in a secure and raised position
In order to obtain easy and safe access to the underside of the machine, place it in a secure and
raised position.
DANGER
Standing under suspended loads
If the lifting gear or load handling attachments were to fail, the machine could fall. This can
result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Never remain under or in the immediate vicinity of the machine when it is raised.
NOTICE
Damage due to condensation
If the stator winding is damp, its insulation resistance is reduced. This can result in voltage
flashovers, which can destroy the winding. Condensation can cause rusting inside the
machine.
● Make sure that the condensation can always drain away freely.
5.3.6 Open the condensation water drain holes (water-cooled motor)
In the bearing shields at the DE and NDE, a water drain hole ① is situated in the foot area and
another opposite the regreasing device.
Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
58 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Figure 5-2 Water drain holes
● Make sure that the condensation can always drain away freely.
● The plug that has been inserted into the water drain holes allows the condensation to drain
away. Do not remove the plug, otherwise the machine's degree of protection will be affected.
● If you have any questions, contact the Siemens Service Center (Page 161).
5.3.7 Open condensation drain holes (air-cooled motor, L12)
If the machine is ordered with option L12, then for types 1PH818. and 1PH822., a water drain
hole with plugs is provided in the DE and NDE bearing shields. For type 1PH828., there are
water drain holes without plugs at the DE and NDE.
Figure 5-3 Water drain holes, for types 1PH818., 1PH822.
Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 59
● Make sure that the condensation can always drain away freely.
● The plug that has been inserted into the water drainage holes allows the condensation to
drain away. Do not remove the plug, otherwise the machine's degree of protection will be
affected.
● If you have any questions, contact the Siemens Service Center (Page 161).
5.3.8 Putting the machine down
Requirements
The following preconditions must be satisfied before setting down the machine at the
installation location:
● The mating faces must be clean.
● The anti-corrosion protection paint has been removed from the mating faces, such as the
machine mounting feet, flange, ...
● There is no condensation present within the machine.
Setting down the machine
● Set down the machine slowly and carefully at the installation location to avoid any impact.
5.3.9 Roughly aligning the machine
Requirement
The transmission element such as a coupling half has already been pulled on.
Roughly aligning the machine
● For horizontal positioning, push the motor sideways across the foundation. When doing so,
ensure that the axial position is maintained.
Mounting
5.3 Lift the machine to where it will be mounted and position it
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
60 Operating Instructions 01/2019
5.4 Installing the machine
5.4.1 Selecting fixing screws
● Unless specified otherwise, use mounting bolts with at least strength class 8.8 to ISO 898‑1.
In this way you guarantee that the machine is securely mounted and the forces can be
transferred through the torque.
● Take into account the maximum forces occurring in the case of a fault such as short circuit
or system transfers in phase opposition.
– When selecting the bolts
– When designing the foundation
See also
Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections (Page 163)
5.4.2 Preconditions for smooth, vibration-free operation
Preconditions for smooth, vibration-free operation:
● Stable foundation design
● Precise alignment of the machine
● Correct balancing of parts to be fitted to the shaft end.
● Maintaining the vibration velocity according to ISO 10816‑3
5.4.3 Vibration severity
Due to the influencing variables listed below, the vibration response of the system at the site of
operation can lead to increased vibration severity at the motor:
● Transmission elements
● Assembly conditions
● Alignment and installation
● Effects of external vibrations
Under certain circumstances, the rotor may have to be balanced completely with the output
element.
Please take care to ensure that the vibration severity specified in accordance with ISO 10816
is not exceeded at the defined measuring points on the motor. By doing this, you can ensure
problem-free operation and a long service life.
Mounting
5.4 Installing the machine
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 61
Maximum permitted vibration severity
The values for the maximum permitted radial and axial vibration severity must both be
maintained.
Table 5-2 Maximum permitted radial vibration severity
Vibration frequency Vibration values1)
< 6.3 Hz Vibration displacement s ≤ 0.25 mm
6.3 to 63 Hz Vibration velocity vrms ≤ 7.1 mm/s
> 63 Hz Vibration acceleration a ≤ 4.0 m/s2
Table 5-3 Maximum permitted axial vibration severity
Vibration velocity Vibration acceleration
vrms = 7.1 mm/s apeak = 3.55 m/s2
DืPVt
VืPP
Figure 5-4 Max. permissible vibration velocity, taking into account the vibration displacement and
vibration acceleration
To measure the vibration velocity, the measuring equipment must fulfill the requirements of
ISO 2954.
The vibration acceleration must be measured as a peak value in the time domain in a frequency
band of 10 to 2000 Hz.
If excitation in excess of 2000 Hz (e.g. gear tooth meshing frequencies) is to be expected, then
you must adapt the measuring range accordingly. This does not alter the maximum permissible
values.
Mounting
5.4 Installing the machine
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
62 Operating Instructions 01/2019
5.4.4 Aligning to the driven machine
Vertical and horizontal alignment
The following measures are required in order to compensate any radial offset at the coupling
and to horizontally adjust the motor with respect to the driven machine:
● The contact surfaces of the motor feet must lie on one plane. Place shims under the motor
feet to position it vertically and to prevent any stress/distortion. The number of shims should
be kept as low as possible, so use as few thicker shims as possible, instead of several
thinner shims.
● Shift the motor to the side on the foundation for horizontal positioning. Pay attention to
maintaining the axial position.
● When positioning the motor, ensure that a uniform axial gap is maintained around the
coupling.
Alignment accuracy
Note
Alignment accuracy
Remember to take account of data concerning the alignment accuracy of the driven load and
the coupling.
Mounting
5.4 Installing the machine
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 63
1. Align the motors with coupling output in such a manner that the center lines of the shafts are
parallel with no offset. This ensures that no additional forces affect their bearings during
operation.
2. Perform the fine adjustments with plates under the entire motor foot.
'
[
\
Figure 5-5 Aligning the motor
Table 5-4 Permissible deviations when aligning the motor
Permissible deviations Radial shaft offset [x] Axial shaft offset [y]
Flexible coupling 0.05 mm 0.05 mm
Mounting
5.4 Installing the machine
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
64 Operating Instructions 01/2019
5.4.5 Mounting the motor
Fixing by means of motor feet
● Select foot screws as per ISO 898-1 in compliance with the loading conditions and machine
type:
● Use foot screws with a minimum property class of 8.8.
● Pin the mounting feet to the customer foundation for motors with types of construction B6,
B7, B8, V5 and V6.
Type Foot screw size
1PH818. M12
1PH822. M16
1PH828. M20
Flange mounting
The flange is only used to transfer the torque. Due to the empty weight or as a result of
vibrations that arise if the flange is too soft, the motor can be damaged if it is only fastened via
the flange.
1. Fasten the flange-mounted motors via a stable motor suspension and support them via the
end shield feet (foot flange type of construction).
2. During commissioning, ensure that the permitted vibration values are maintained in
accordance with ISO 10816‑3.
If the motor is to be only flange mounted, then the maximum speed nmax is reduced for rigid
foundations according to the following table:
Type Maximum speed nmax
1PH818. 3000 1/min
1PH822. 2500 1/min
1PH828. 2000 1/min
Maximum speed for a rigid foundation and flange mounting
5.5 Connecting the cooling water supply
The inlet and outlet sockets for the cooling water supply are situated on the non-drive end in the
bearing shield area. On the bearing shield, there are two hexagonal couplers with a female
thread, which are each screwed onto a washer: At shaft heights of 180 and 225, hexagonal
couplers with 3/8" female threads are used, at a shaft height of 280 1/2" female threads are
used.
1. Only use valves, fittings and cooling water pipes made of rust-proof, stainless steel in the
cooling system.
2. Make sure that the cooling water meets the required cooling water specification, see section
headed "Cooling Water Quality" (Page 29).
Mounting
5.5 Connecting the cooling water supply
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 65
3. Make sure that the appropriate volume of cooling water is available, see Rating Plate
(Page 21).
4. Hold the hexagon head with an open-ended wrench while you screw in the water pipes.
5. Screw the cooling water pipes into the female thread. You can connect the inlet and outlet
as required.
NOTICE
Securing the hexagonal couplers
The hexagonal couplers are connected directly to the water pipes inside the machine.
Applying excessive torque when screwing in can damage the pipe system.
Hold the couplers steady with an open-ended wrench when you screw in the water pipes.
6. Ensure that the maximum permissible operating pressure does not exceed 6 bar.
The pressure drop is determined by the machine type and the shaft height:
Table 5-5 Rate of flow and pressure drop
Type Flow rate Pressure drop
1PH8 184 15 l/min 0.6 bar
1PH8 186 15 l/min 0.7 bar
1PH8 224 20 l/min 0.6 bar
1PH8 226 20 l/min 0.6 bar
1PH8 228 20 l/min 0.6 bar
1PH8 284 35 l/min 0.6 bar
1PH8 286 35 l/min 0.6 bar
1PH8 288 35 l/min 0.6 bar
5.6 Refitting the external fan
Subsequently changing the air flow direction from NDE to DE or vice versa must only be carried
out by qualified personnel or a Siemens Service Center (Page 161).
Mounting
5.6 Refitting the external fan
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
66 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Electrical connection 6
6.1 Safety instructions for the electrical connection
Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine:
● Comply with the general safety instructions.
● Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations.
● When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid
down in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment.
See also
Safety information (Page 15)
Material damage as a result of connection parts coming loose
If you use fixing elements made from the wrong material or apply the wrong tightening torque,
this could impair current transfer or cause connecting parts to become loose. This could result
in material damage to the machine or even in total failure, which could in turn lead indirectly to
material damage to the system.
● Tighten the screwed connections to the specified tightening torques.
● Observe any specifications regarding the materials from which fixing elements must be
made.
● When performing servicing, check the fastenings.
See also
Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections (Page 163)
Electrostatically sensitive devices
The DRIVE-CLiQ interface contains components that are susceptible to electrostatic charging.
Touching connections with electrostatically charged hands or tools can cause malfunctions.
● Maintain the ESD protective measures (Page 18) as well as the 5 safety rules (Page 15).
Note
Service Center
If you require support when electrically connecting up the machine, please contact the Service
Center (Page 161).
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 67
6.2 Preparation
6.2.1 Selecting cables
Take the following criteria into account when selecting the connecting cables:
● Rated current
● Rated voltage
● If required, service factor
● System-dependent conditions, such as ambient temperature, routing type, cable cross-
section as defined by required length of cable, etc.
● Configuration notes
● Requirements according to IEC/EN 60204‑1
6.2.2 Connect up the ground conductor
The grounding conductor of the motor must be in full conformance with the installation
regulations, e.g. in accordance with IEC/EN 60204-1.
● Connect the ground conductor to the end shield of the motor. There is a fixing lug ① for the
ground conductor at the designated connection point.
– The fixing lug ① is suitable for grounding high-frequency currents using HF ribbon cable
with appropriately formed conductor ends.
● When making connections, ensure the following:
– the connecting surface is bare and protected against corrosion using a suitable
substance, e.g. acid-free Vaseline
– the flat and spring washers are located under the bolt head.
Figure 6-1 Terminal lug ① for the grounding conductor for a force-ventilated motor
Electrical connection
6.2 Preparation
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
68 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Figure 6-2 Terminal lug ① for the grounding conductor for a water-cooled motor
6.3 Connecting
Depending on the version, different terminal boxes may be installed on the machine.
Depending on the terminal box, different cable entries and options for the cable connection are
possible. You can identify the terminal box installed on the machine via the illustrations in the
following chapters.
6.3.1 Circuit diagram
Data on the connection and connecting the motor winding can be found in the circuit diagram
in the cover of the terminal box.
6.3.2 Terminal designation
According to IEC / EN 60034‑8, the following basic definitions apply to the terminal
designations for 3-phase machines:
Table 6-1 Terminal designations using the 1U1-1 as an example
1 U 1 - 1 Designation
x Index for pole assignment for pole-changing machines where applicable. A lower
index signifies a lower speed. Special case for split winding.
x Phase designation U, V, W
x Index for winding start (1) or end (2) or if there is more than one connection per
winding
x Additional indices for cases in which it is obligatory to connect parallel power feed
cables to several terminals with otherwise identical designations
Electrical connection
6.3 Connecting
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 69
6.3.3 Laying cables
● Lay the cables in accordance with IEC/EN 60364-5-52.
● Use EMC cable glands for fixed cables. Screw the EMC cable glands into the threaded
holes in the entry plate, which can be unscrewed.
● Use shielded cables whose shields are conductively connected to a large area of the
terminal box of the motor via EMC cable glands.
● In the case of aluminum connecting bars, insert a steel washer between the cable lug and
the connecting bar. This prevents contact corrosion.
● Arrange the exposed connecting cables in the terminal box so that the PE conductor has
excess length and the insulation of the cable strands cannot be damaged.
● Close off unused bushings with a metal threaded plug. This is the way to achieve a high
frequency-proof shielding.
6.3.4 Electrical connection data
Cable entry and technical connection data depend on the mounted terminal box. You can find
more information on the terminal box that is mounted in the ordering documentation or in the
catalog.
1XB7 322 1XB7 422
Electrical connection
6.3 Connecting
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
70 Operating Instructions 01/2019
1XB7 700 1XB7 712 (*)
① main terminal ③ signal connection terminal
② ground terminal ④ signal connection
Table 6-2 Data for electrical connection
Terminal box type 1XB7 322 1XB7 422 1XB7 700 1XB7 712 (*)
Cable entry 2 x M50 x 1.5 2 x M63 x 1.5 3 x M75 x 1.5 4 x M75 x 1.5
Max. poss. cable outer diameter 38 mm 53 mm 68 mm 68 mm
Number of main terminals 3 x M12 3 x M12 3 x 3 x M12 3 x 4 x M16
Max. cross-section per terminal 2 x 50 mm22 x 70 mm23 x 150 mm24 x 185 mm2
Max. current per terminal ①210 A 270 A 700 A 1150 A
Number of ground terminals 4 x M6 4 x M8 Terminal strip 4 x M16
① Current carrying capacity based on IEC / EN 60204-1 or IEC / EN 60364-5-32
6.3.5 Connection with cable lugs
1. To connect the cables to the main terminals, select cable lugs that match the necessary
cable cross-section and appropriate screw size.
The connectable cable cross section is determined by the cable lug size for example.
– Cable lug in accordance with DIN 46234 from 35 mm2 to 185 mm2,
– Cable lug in accordance with DIN 46235 from 35 mm2 to 185 mm2.
Observe the possible outer diameter of the connecting cable in the chapter entitled
"Electrical connection data".
Connect only one conductor per cable lug.
2. Remove the insulation from the conductor ends so that the remaining insulation is almost
long enough to reach the cable lug.
Electrical connection
6.3 Connecting
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 71
3. Fasten the cable lug to the end of the conductor correctly, e.g. by crimping.
4. If necessary, insulate the cable lugs in order to maintain the minimum clearances of 10 mm
and the 20 mm creepage distance, which are normally available.
The tightening torque for contact nuts and fixing screws depends on the size of the screw,
see Case A in the table in Chapter Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections
(Page 163).
Connection using a cable lug at terminal boxes 1XB7 322 / 1XB7 422
①Customer connecting cable
②Internal motor connecting cable
③Copper spacer ring
Connection using a cable lug at terminal boxes 1XB7 700 / 1XB7 712
①Customer connecting cable
②Connection bar
Electrical connection
6.3 Connecting
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
72 Operating Instructions 01/2019
See also
Electrical connection data (Page 70)
6.3.6 Connecting aluminum conductors
If you are using aluminum conductors, comply in addition with the following:
● Use only cable lugs that are suitable for connecting aluminum conductors.
● Immediately before inserting the aluminum conductor, remove the oxide layer from the
contact areas on the conductor and/or the mating piece, by brushing or filing.
● Then grease the contact areas immediately using neutral vaseline in order to avoid re-
oxidation.
NOTICE
Aluminum flow due to contact pressure
Aluminum flows following installation due to the contact pressure. The connection with the
clamping nuts can loosen as a result. The contact resistance would increase and the
current-carrying impeded; as a consequence the terminal box and the surrounding
components could burn. This could result in material damage to the machine or even in
total failure, which could in turn lead to indirect material damage to the system.
Retighten the clamping nuts after approximately 24 hours and then again after
approximately four weeks. Make sure that the terminals are de-energized before you
tighten the nuts.
6.3.7 Stepless mating face for the seal in the terminal box cover
The sealing face of the terminal box cover is formed by the terminal box enclosure and the cable
entry element. Therefore make sure these parts are correctly aligned, so as to ensure the seal
and hence the degree of protection.
Align the cable entry support and the cable entry plate to the terminal box enclosure so that the
sealing surface between the terminal box and the terminal box cover form a flat face. There
must be no steps in the sealing area.
Electrical connection
6.3 Connecting
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 73
6.3.8 Performing connection operations
1. Before closing the terminal box, please check that:
– The electrical connections in the terminal box are tight and are in full compliance with the
specifications above.
– The required clearances in air of 10 mm are maintained.
– Wire ends do not protrude.
– The inside of the terminal box is clean and free of any cable debris.
– All seals and sealing surfaces are undamaged.
– The connecting cables are arranged so that they do not come into contact with the
machine, and the cable insulation cannot be damaged.
– unused entry points are sealed. The sealing elements are firmly screwed in, i.e. they can
only be removed with a tool.
– The cable/conductor glands are fitted compliant with the specifications regarding degree
of protection, cable routing type, permissible cable diameter etc.
2. Then close the terminal box with the terminal box cover fixing screws.
See also
Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections (Page 163)
6.3.9 Internal equipotential bonding
The internal equipotential bonding between the grounding terminal in the box enclosure and the
motor frame is established through the terminal box retaining bolts. The contact locations
underneath the bolt heads are bare metal and protected against corrosion.
The standard cover fixing screws are sufficient for equipotential bonding between the terminal
box cover and terminal box housing.
Note
Connecting points are available at the frame or bearing end shield to connect an external
protective conductor or potential bonding connector.
See also
Connect up the ground conductor (Page 68)
Electrical connection
6.3 Connecting
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
74 Operating Instructions 01/2019
6.4 Auxiliary circuits
6.4.1 Selecting cables
Take the following criteria into account when selecting the connecting cables for the auxiliary
circuits:
● Rated current
● Rated voltage
● System-dependent conditions, such as ambient temperature, routing type, cable cross-
section as defined by required length of cable, etc.
● Requirements according to IEC/EN 60204‑1
6.4.2 Connecting an external fan
Preconditions
● Only use cables that comply with the relevant installation regulations regarding voltage,
current, insulation material, and load-carrying capacity.
● Before connecting the device, make sure that the line voltage matches the device voltage.
● Check whether the data on the fan rating plate matches the connection data.
● Cable glands are not included in the scope of supply. Close unused cable entries,
otherwise, the degree of protection is not maintained.
● The line voltage corresponds to the quality attributes laid down in DIN EN 50160 and the
defined standard voltages laid down in DIN IEC 60038.
Procedure
1. Open the terminal box of the external fan and route the cables into it. The cables are not
included in the scope of supply.
2. Connect the protective conductor (PE).
3. Connect the other cables to the relevant terminals, refer to the connection diagram in the
terminal box.
Connection cables must not be subject to excessive tensile stress.
Note
For fans equipped with EC motor, the fan motor starts with a delay after the line voltage is
connected.
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 75
Protection against humidity
Protect the external fan against moisture. Water must not be allowed to run along the cables
and into the terminal box of the external fan.
● Use suitable cables at the connection cable gland on the terminal box.
● Attach the terminal box cover of the external fan orrectly and completely.
WARNING
Voltages at the internal motor connections
The motor may continue running, e.g. due to airflow, or may run on after being shut down. This
means that dangerous voltages of over 50 V can occur at the internal motor connections. This
can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● For safety reasons, it is not permissible to make any unauthorized modifications or
changes to the fan.
● Wait until the external fan has come to a standstill before approaching it.
● Provide a protective circuit that prevents the main motor from being switched on when the
external fan is not in operation.
– After a power failure or when the power has been disconnected, the external fan starts
up automatically again when the voltage is restored.
– The external fan can automatically switch on and switch off as a result of its inherent
function.
See also
Interlock circuit for the external fan (Page 33)
NOTICE
Overheating when the factory-installed jumper is removed
If the company operating the plant or system removes the jumper in the EC fan terminal box
(which was inserted in the factory), then that company becomes responsible for the functional
safety of the drive. The motor can overheat. This can result in material damage.
● Carefully follow the safety instructions.
Supply values
Type Option Fan Supply voltage Power consumption*
1PH818. Standard Single-phase
EC
1~ AC 200 … 277 V (±10 %)
50/60 Hz ±10 %
1.1 A ... 1.3 A
1PH818. L76 Three-phase
EC
3~ AC 380 … 480 V (-5 %/+10 %)
50/60 Hz ±10 %
0.44 A ... 0.5 A
1PH822. Standard Single-phase
EC
1~ AC 200 … 277 V (±10 %)
50/60 Hz ±10 %
2.0 A ... 2.3 A
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
76 Operating Instructions 01/2019
1PH822. L76 Three-phase
EC
3~ AC 380 … 480 V (-5 %/+10 %)
50/60 Hz ±10 %
0.75 A ... 0.9 A
1PH828. Standard Three-phase
EC
3~ AC 380 … 480 V (-5 %/+10 %)
50/60 Hz ±10 %
0.75 A ... 0.9 A
Connection values for external fans
* For EC fans, as a result of the electronic input circuitry, the current drawn can briefly reach four times the
specified current.
See also
Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK180 (Page 249)
6.4.2.1 Connecting an EC external fan
The external fan is connected in the external fan terminal box. If necessary, you can rotate the
external fan through 90°.
Figure 6-3 External fan terminal box ① (schematic representation)
NOTICE
Short circuit due to standing water
Water that accumulates at the cable glands can result in a short circuit.
● It is not permissible that the cable outlet points upward.
● Rotate the terminal box cover of the external fan through 180°.
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 77
See also
Interlock circuit for the external fan (Page 33)
6.4.2.2 Connecting an external fan with three-phase motor (option L75)
The external fan is connected in the external fan terminal box.
ແ
Figure 6-4 External fan terminal box ① (schematic representation)
NOTICE
An external fan is only suitable for one direction of rotation
The external fan is only designed for one direction of rotation corresponding to the direction of
rotation arrow. Operation with the wrong direction of rotation can cause overheating or
destruction of the motor.
● Ensure that the external fan is operated in the proper direction of rotation. The direction-of-
rotation arrow and the direction of movement of the fan impeller are indicated on the rear
side of the blower.
● If necessary, change the direction of rotation by interchanging two phase conductors in the
external fan terminal box.
See also
Interlock circuit for the external fan (Page 33)
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
78 Operating Instructions 01/2019
6.4.2.3 Supply values for external fans with three-phase motor (option L75)
Supply values
The external fan with three-phase motor has a terminal box that is mounted on the external fan
motor.
Air-flow direction 3 AC 400 V
/ 50 Hz
(±10 %)
3 AC 400 V
/ 60 Hz (1)
(±10 %)
3 AC 480 V
/ 60 Hz (1)
(+5 %,
-10 %)
Sound pressure level LpA
(1 m)
Motor + external fan unit
50 Hz operation
Tolerance +3 dB
Rated pulse frequency
2 kHz
Air flow
rate at 50
Hz, ap‐
prox.
[A] [A] [A] [dB] [m3/s]
1PH8 forced ventilation degree of protection IP55, option L75
1PH818.-...0.-...1-Z
1PH818.-...1.-...1-Z
DE → NDE
NDE → DE
2.25 2.25 1.98 76 (2) 0.17
1PH822.-...0.-...1-Z
1PH822.-...1.-...1-Z
DE → NDE
NDE → DE
2.25 2.25 1.98 76 (2) 0.31
1PH8 open-circuit ventilated, degree of protection IP23, option L75
1PH818.-...3.-...1-Z
1PH818.-...4.-...1-Z
DE → NDE
NDE → DE
2.25 2.25 1.98 76 (3) 0.21
1PH822.-...3.-...1-Z
1PH822.-...4.-...1-Z
DE → NDE
NDE → DE
2.25 2.25 1.98 76 (3) 0.33
(1) 60 Hz operation only permissible with throttle plate
(2) Speed ranges: 1PH818. up to 5000 rpm, 1PH822. up to 3500 rpm
(3) Speed ranges: 1PH818. up to 3000 rpm, 1PH822. up to 2000 rpm
1. Connect the power supply in the terminal box. The terminal diagram is in the terminal box
cover.
①Terminal box of the external fan
②Cable entry
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 79
NOTICE
Incorrect direction of rotation
The external fan is only suitable for one direction of rotation. Operation with the wrong
direction of rotation can destroy the motor.
● If necessary, change the direction of rotation by interchanging two phase conductors in the
terminal box. The direction of rotation arrow and the direction of rotation of the fan impeller
can be seen at the rear of the fan.
6.4.2.4 Attached air discharge throttle plate (option L75)
When operated from a 60 Hz line supply, you require the air discharge throttle plate provided
in the terminal box.
NOTICE
Operation without air discharge throttle plate
The external fan motor can be damaged if it is operated on a 60 Hz line supply without air
discharge throttle plate.
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
80 Operating Instructions 01/2019
● Screw the air discharge throttle plate ② to the air discharge mesh.
①Fixing screws for air discharge throttle metal plate
②Air discharge throttle metal plate
Figure 6-5 Throttle plate for suction-type ventilation (DE to NDE)
①Fixing screws for air discharge throttle metal plate
②Air discharge throttle metal plate
Figure 6-6 Throttle plate for forced-draft ventilation (NDE to DE)
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 81
6.4.3 Connecting the speed encoder
The speed encoder is connected at the terminal box using a plug connection ①. This is located
on the terminal box enclosure.
Figure 6-7 Detailed view: Plug-in connection
Note
The plug-in connection may differ from the standard layout in the case of special orders. For
versions without speed encoder, connection thread M16x1.5 is located here.
Connecting a speed encoder via DRIVE-CLiQ
The signal connection between the motor and the converter is established via the DRIVE‑CLiQ
cable MOTION‑CONNECT.
● Always use prefabricated cables from Siemens. These cables reduce the mounting/
installation time and costs and increase operational reliability.
● Push the connector of the DRIVE‑CLiQ cable into the socket until the catch spring latches
into place. Pay attention to the coding of the connector.
Cable outlet directions
The sensor module is mounted on the motor terminal box. The sensor module can be rotated
through approximately 235°. You can change the cable outlet directions by rotating the sensor
module, as shown in the diagram below.
NOTICE
Damage to the sensor module
You can damage the sensor module if you turn it with a pipe wrench, a hammer, or similar
tools.
Turn the sensor module by hand. The typical torque is approx. 4 ... 8 Nm.
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
82 Operating Instructions 01/2019
r
Figure 6-8 Sensor Module ① mounted on the terminal box
NOTICE
Modifying the cable outlet direction
Changing the cable outlet direction by any improper means will damage the connecting
cables.
The permissible rotation range must not be exceeded. A maximum of ten changes to the
rotation angle of the Sensor Module are permissible within the rotation range.
6.4.4 Connect the holding brake
Information for electrically connecting the holding brake can be found in the operating
instructions supplied by the manufacturer in the (Page 169) appendix.
6.4.5 Connecting the temperature sensor
● The temperature sensor is connected to the signal connector together with the speed
encoder signal.
● For the version without speed encoder, the temperature sensor is connected at the terminal
strip.
● The motor has a reserve temperature sensor, which is also connected at the auxiliary
terminal strip. Reconnect the temperature sensor as needed, e.g. if the previous
temperature sensor fails.
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 83
WARNING
Risk of electric shock
The insulation of the temperature sensors for the winding monitoring with respect to the
winding is implemented according to the requirements for basic insulation. The temperature
sensor connections are located in terminal boxes, safe to touch - and have no protective
separation. This is the reason that in the case of a fault, a hazardous voltage can be present
at the measuring sensor cable. When touched, this can result in death, severe bodily injury
and material damage.
● When connecting the temperature sensor to external temperature monitoring devices,
when required, apply additional measures to fully comply with the requirements set out in
IEC 60664-1 or IEC 61800-5-1 "Hazard due to electric shock".
6.4.6 Connecting to a converter
Selecting and connecting the cable
● Use Motion Connect cables or symmetrically constructed, shielded cables to connect the
motor to a converter. The cable shielding, made up of as many strands as possible, must
have good electrical conductivity. Braided shields made of copper or aluminum are well
suited.
● The shield is connected at both ends, at the motor and converter. Keep unshielded cable
ends as short as possible.
● In order to ensure that high-frequency currents are efficiently discharged, provide a 360°
contact through a large surface area at the converter and at the motor. Use for instance,
EMC glands at the cable entries.
Measures to reduce bearing currents
To specifically reduce and prevent damage caused by bearing currents, consider the system
as a whole, which comprises the motor, converter, and driven machine. The following
precautions help to prevent bearing currents:
● Setting up a properly meshed grounding system in the system as a whole, with low
impedance for high-frequency currents
● No potential difference between the motor, converter, and working machine.
– Use symmetrical, shielded connecting cables.
– Connect the cable shield at both ends over the greatest possible surface area (360°
contact).
– Use equipotential bonding conductors between the motor and the driven machine as
well as between the motor and the converter
● Limit the voltage rate of rise by using an output filter to dampen harmonic components in the
output voltage
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
84 Operating Instructions 01/2019
6.4.7 Converter operation on a grounded network
NOTICE
Damage resulting from protective conductor currents
When the machine is operated on a converter with current limiter, but without ground-fault
monitoring, protective conductor currents of up to 1.7 times the external conductor current can
arise if there is a ground fault on the output side. Neither the PE conductors of normally rated
multi-core connecting cables nor the PE connecting points of normal terminal boxes are
suitable for this purpose. Material damage can result.
● Use an appropriately sized PE conductor.
● Connect the PE conductor to the grounding terminal on the motor enclosure.
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 85
Electrical connection
6.4 Auxiliary circuits
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
86 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Commissioning 7
Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine:
● Comply with the general safety instructions
● Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations.
● When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid
down in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment.
See also
Safety information (Page 15)
WARNING
Magnetic field when the holding brake is open
If the motor is equipped with a holding brake, then the shaft extension is magnetized when the
holding brake is open, i.e. if a voltage is connected to it.
Magnetic objects will then be suddenly attracted as a result of this magnetic field. This can
result in death, severe injury or material damage.
● Working close to the shaft extension is only permissible in exceptional, justified cases.
Clear access rules must be applied and complied with corresponding to magnetic fields at
the workplace. Clearly mark the boundaries of the areas where standing is permitted.
● People who need to use electronic or magnetic medical aids such as pacemakers, hearing
aids, implants or similar devices, are at particularly high risk. Such persons must undergo
an occupational health assessment.
● Observe the following measures.
Personal protective measures
● Ensure that you never wear or carry any of the following objects and that they are kept a safe
distance from the machine:
– All kinds of magnetic metal parts such as, keys, glasses, tools, knives, scissors, tape
measures, etc.
– Magnetic jewelry such as rings, chains, needles, watches, etc.
– Electronic devices and data carriers such as service cards, check cards, credit cards,
calculators, cell phones, etc.
– Wallets or other iron-containing objects
– Electrically conductive foreign bodies
● Do not use any magnetic tools or lifting devices.
● Wear only occupational safety items without magnetic metal parts, e.g. occupational safety
shoes with non-magnetic protective caps and soles.
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 87
● Keep your shoes and clothing free from chips and waste containing iron.
● Exercise caution when installing accessories. Ensure that no parts fall into the inside of the
machine.
● Do not perform any cutting at the machine, e.g. drilling threaded holes. Any exceptions
require written approval from the manufacturer.
See also
The 5 safety rules (Page 15)
7.1 Insulation resistance and polarization index
Measuring the insulation resistance and polarization index (PI) provides information on the
condition of the machine. It is therefore important to check the insulation resistance and the
polarization index at the following times:
● Before starting up a machine for the first time
● After an extended period in storage or downtime
● Within the scope of maintenance work
The following information is provided regarding the state of the winding insulation:
● Is the winding head insulation conductively contaminated?
● Has the winding insulation absorbed moisture?
As such, you can determine whether the machine needs commissioning or any necessary
measures such as cleaning and/or drying the winding:
● Can the machine be put into operation?
● Must the windings be cleaned or dried?
Detailed information on testing and the limit values can be found here:
"Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index" (Page 51)
NOTICE
Damage to the converter
The electronics of the integrated converter can be destroyed when measuring the insulation
resistance at the EC external fan.
● Do not measure the insulation resistance of the EC external fan.
● More information can be found in the instructions of the EC external fan.
Commissioning
7.1 Insulation resistance and polarization index
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
88 Operating Instructions 01/2019
7.2 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning
Once the system has been correctly installed, you should check the following prior to
commissioning:
Note
Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning
The following list of checks to be performed prior to commissioning does not claim to be
complete. It may be necessary to perform further checks and tests in accordance with the
specific situation on-site.
● The machine is undamaged.
● The machine has been correctly installed and aligned, the transmission elements are
correctly balanced and adjusted.
● All fixing screws, connection elements, and electrical connections have been tightened to
the specified tightening torques.
● The operating conditions match the data provided in accordance with the technical
documentation, such as degree of protection, ambient temperature, etc..
● Moving parts such as the coupling move freely.
● All touch protection measures for moving and live parts have been taken.
● For test operation or when commissioning without output element, carefully secure the
feather key using a suitable security element. When doing this, take into account the
balancing type of the motor.
● If the second shaft extension is not in use, its feather key is secured to prevent it from being
thrown out, and cut back to roughly half its length if the rotor has balancing type "H"
(standard type). The unused shaft extension is covered and protected against accidental
contact.
● The rotor can spin without coming into contact with the stator.
● The bearing insulation is not bridged.
Electrical connection
● The grounding and equipotential bonding connections have been made correctly.
● The machine is connected so that it rotates in the direction specified.
● Appropriately configured control and speed monitoring functions ensure that the motor
cannot exceed the permissible speeds specified in the technical data. For this purpose,
compare the data on the rating plate or, if necessary, the system-specific documentation.
● The minimum insulation resistance values are within tolerance.
● Minimum air clearances have been maintained.
● Any supplementary motor monitoring devices and equipment have been correctly
connected and are functioning correctly.
Commissioning
7.2 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 89
● All brakes and backstops are operating correctly.
● At the monitoring devices, the values for "Warning" and "Shutdown" are set.
● Appropriately configured control and speed monitoring functions ensure that the the
permissible speeds specified on the rating plate cannot be exceeded.
● Any supplementary motor monitoring devices and equipment have been correctly
connected and are fully functional.
Converter operation
● If the design of the motor requires connection to a particular converter type, the rating plate
will contain corresponding additional information.
● The converter is correctly parameterized. The parameterization data is specified on the
rating plate of the machine. Information about the parameters is available in the operating
instructions for the converter.
● Any supplementary motor monitoring devices and equipment have been correctly
connected and are functioning correctly.
Roller bearing
● If the motor has been stored for more than two years in a dry, dust-free and vibration-free
room, prepare for commissioning as follows:
– Replace the rolling-contact bearings on motors with lifetime lubrication.
– Replace the grease in motors with re-greasing system.
– If stored under less favorable conditions, the bearings or the grease must be replaced
after a storage period of approx. 18 months.
Table 7-1 Minimum radial forces
Type Minimum radial force
1PH818. 4 kN
1PH822. 5 kN
1PH828. 9 kN
External fan
● All external fans fitted are ready for operation and have been connected so that they rotate
in the direction specified.
● The flow of cooling air is not impeded.
Cooling water supply
● The cooling water supply is connected and ready for operation.
● The cooling water supply is switched on. The data can be found on the rating plate.
● Cooling water is available in the configured quality and quantity.
Commissioning
7.2 Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
90 Operating Instructions 01/2019
7.3 Perform a test run with the water-cooled motor
If you want to start the machine for a trial run, ensure that it is connected to the cooling water
supply.
WARNING
Risk of burning from hot steam
If the cooling water supply fails, the motor will overheat. If cooling water runs into the hot
machine, hot steam suddenly forms, which escapes under high pressure. The cooling water
system can burst. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Do not connect the cooling water supply until the machine has cooled down.
7.4 Switching on
● See the operating instructions of the frequency converter for switching on.
● Before you switch on the motor, ensure that the parameters of the frequency converter have
been assigned correctly.
● Use appropriate commissioning tools, such as "Drive ES" or "STARTER".
NOTICE
Operation noise or abnormal noises
The motor can be damaged by improper handling during transport, storage or set up. If a
damaged motor is operated damage to the winding, bearings or, complete destruction of
the motor can be the result.
If the motor is not running smoothly or is emitting abnormal noises, de-energize it, and
determine the cause of the fault as the motor runs down.
Maximum speed
The maximum rotational speed nmax is the highest permissible operating speed. The maximum
rotational speed is specified on the rating plate.
See also
Description (Page 21)
Commissioning
7.3 Perform a test run with the water-cooled motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 91
7.5 Test run
After installation or inspection, carry out a test run:
1. Switch on the cooling systems.
2. Start up the machine without a load. To do this, close the circuit breaker and do not switch
off prematurely. Check whether it is running smoothly.
Switching the machine off again while it is starting up and still running at slow speed should
be kept to a bare minimum, for example for checking the direction of rotation or for checking
in general.
Allow the machine to run down before switching it on again.
3. If it runs perfectly, connect a load.
4. During the test run, check and document the following:
– Check whether it is running smoothly.
– Document the voltage, current and power values. As far as possible, document the
corresponding values of the driven machine.
– If this is possible using the available measuring equipment, check the bearing and stator
winding temperatures until they have reached steady-state values.
– Check the machine for noise or vibrations on the bearings or bearing shields as it runs.
5. In case of uneven running or abnormal noise, switch off the machine. As the machine runs
down, identify the cause.
– If the mechanical operation improves immediately after the machine is switched off, then
the cause is magnetic or electrical.
– If the mechanical running does not improve immediately after switching the machine off,
then the cause is mechanical.
- Imbalance of the electrical machine or the driven machine
- The machine set has not been adequately aligned
- The machine is being operated at the system resonance point. System = motor, base
frame, foundation, ...
NOTICE
Serious damage to the machine
If the vibration values in operation are not maintained in accordance with DIN ISO
10816-3, then the machine can be mechanically destroyed.
● During operation, observe the vibration values in accordance with DIN ISO 10816‑3.
Commissioning
7.5 Test run
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
92 Operating Instructions 01/2019
7.6 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperature (optional)
Prior to commissioning
If the machine is equipped with bearing thermometers, set the temperature value for
disconnection on the monitoring equipment before the first machine run.
Table 7-2 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperatures before commissioning
Set value Temperature
Alarm 115 °C
Shutting down 120 °C
Normal operation
Determine the maximum operating temperature of the bearings Toperation taking into account the
temperature, bearing load and influences of the plant on the motor in °C. Set the values for
shutdown and warning corresponding to the operating temperature Top.
Table 7-3 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperatures
Set value Temperature
Alarm Toperation + 5 K ≤ 115 °C
Shutting down Toperation + 10 K ≤ 120 °C
Commissioning
7.6 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperature (optional)
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 93
Commissioning
7.6 Set values for monitoring the bearing temperature (optional)
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
94 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Operation 8
8.1 Safety instructions for operation
Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine:
● Comply with the general safety instructions.
● Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations.
● When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid
down in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment.
See also
Safety information (Page 15)
Risk of injury due to rotating parts
Rotating parts are dangerous. Touch protection against rotating parts is no longer guaranteed
if covers are removed. Touching rotating parts can result in death, serious injury or material
damage.
● Carefully ensure that all of the covers are closed while operational.
● First switch off and disconnect the machine if you must remove covers. Comply with the
"Five safety rules":
● Only remove the covers when the rotating parts have come to a complete standstill.
Danger as a result of stationary parts under voltage (live parts)
Live parts represent a hazard. Touch protection against active (live) parts is no longer
guaranteed if covers are removed. The minimum air and creepage distances may be fallen
below (violated) when coming close to active parts. Touching or coming close can result in
death, serious injury or material damage.
● Carefully ensure that all of the covers are closed while operational.
● First switch off and disconnect the machine if you must remove covers. Comply with the
"Five safety rules":
● When the machine is in operation, the terminal boxes must remain closed at all times.
Terminal boxes may be opened only when the machine is stopped and in a no-voltage
condition.
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 95
Risk of burn injuries as a result of hot surfaces
Individual machine parts can become hot in operation. Burns can result when coming into
contact with these parts.
● Never touch machine parts during operation.
● Allow the machine to cool down before starting work.
● Check the temperature of parts before touching them. If required, wear suitable protective
equipment.
Faults in operation
Any changes with respect to the normal condition can indicate that the machine is not
functioning correctly.
● Higher power consumption, temperatures or vibration levels.
● Unusual noise or smells.
● Monitoring devices respond.
These changes can cause faults which can result in eventual or immediate death, serious injury
or material damage.
● Immediately inform the service personnel.
● If you are in doubt, immediately switch off the machine, carefully observing the system-
specific safety conditions.
Damage caused by condensation
Humidity in the air can condense for intermittent duty or load fluctuations. Condensate can
collect. Moisture can have a negative impact on the winding insulation or result in damage, such
as corrosion.
● Ensure that any condensation can freely flow away.
NOTICE
Non-periodic duty
In all of the operating modes, always operate the external fan according to DIN EN 60034-1.
For non-periodic operation, it is possible that the machine is thermally overloaded. This can
result in damage to the machine.
● In the case of extended non-operational periods, the fan should be in operation until the
machine has approximately reached the temperature of the coolant, see S2 duty type in
DIN EN 60034‑1.
● Use a suitable circuit to ensure that the external fan is appropriately operated.
Operation
8.1 Safety instructions for operation
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
96 Operating Instructions 01/2019
NOTICE
EC fan control via an input signal
The fan motor can overheat if the external EC fan is operated at low fan speeds as a result of
the setpoint signal it receives.
● Monitor the motor using the integrated temperature sensors.
● Integrate the temperature monitoring into the interlocking circuit.
8.2 Do not operate water-cooled motors without cooling water
The motor must always be connected to the cooling water supply during operation.
NOTICE
Cooling water supply
If the cooling water supply fails or if the motor is operated for a short time without water cooling,
the motor will overheat. This can result in material damage or even a write-off.
Never operate the motor without the cooling water supply switched on. Monitor the
permissible water inlet temperatures.
WARNING
Risk of burning from hot steam
If the cooling water supply fails, the motor will overheat. If cooling water runs into the hot motor,
hot steam suddenly forms, which escapes under high pressure. The cooling water system can
burst. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Do not connect the cooling water supply until the motor has cooled down.
Operation
8.2 Do not operate water-cooled motors without cooling water
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 97
8.3 Switching on the machine
● After starting the motor, observe it for a while to see if it is running smoothly and check the
monitoring devices.
● Monitor operation and the monitoring devices regularly and record the values you read off.
NOTICE
Speed monitoring
The motor is designed for a certain speed range.
If a motor is operated at impermissible speeds damage to the winding, bearings, or
complete destruction of the motor can be the result.
Ensure that the speeds specified on the rating plate are not exceeded by appropriately
configuring controller and speed monitoring components.
See also
Description (Page 21)
NOTICE
Excessive machine temperature
If the anti-condensation heating is operated while the machine is running, this can increase the
temperatures inside the machine. This can result in material damage.
● Make sure that the anti-condensation heating is switched off before the machine is
switched on.
● Only operate anti-condensation heating when the machine is switched off.
8.4 Switching off water-cooled motors
● Switch off the cooling water supply for longer non-operational periods.
● When switching-off, also observe the converter operating instructions.
● If anti-condensation heating is available, switch it on.
8.5 Switching off force-ventilated motors
● Switch off the external fan during longer standstill periods.
Leave the fan on for approximately 30 minutes after switching off the motor to avoid
overheating of the motor.
● Follow the operating instructions of the converter.
Operation
8.3 Switching on the machine
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
98 Operating Instructions 01/2019
8.6 Switching on again after an emergency switching-off
● Check the machine before recommissioning the driven machine after an Emergency Off.
● Eliminate all the causes that have led to the emergency off
8.7 Stoppages
The stoppage is a shutdown for a period of time, during which the machine is stopped but
remains at the location of use.
Under normal ambient conditions, e. g. the stopped machine is not exposed to any vibration, no
increased level of corrosion, etc. in general, the following measures are necessary during
stoppages.
Measures for machines ready to operate during longer non-operational periods
● For longer periods when the machine is not being used, either energize it at regular intervals
(roughly once a month), or at least spin the rotor.
● Please refer to the section"Switching on" (Page 91) before switching on to recommission the
motor.
NOTICE
Damage due to improper storage
The machine can be damaged if it is not stored properly. If the motor is out of service for
extended periods of time, implement suitable anti-corrosion, preservation, and drying
measures.
When recommissioning the motor after a long period out of service, carry out the measures
recommended in the chapter entitled "Commissioning (Page 87)".
8.7.1 Avoidance of damage to roller bearings during stoppages
Extended stoppages at the identical or almost identical resting position of the roller bearings
can lead to damage such as brinelling or corrosion, for example.
● During stoppages, regularly start the machine up for a brief period once a month. As a
minimum, rotate the rotor several times.
If you have uncoupled the machine from the driven machine and secured the rotor with a
rotor shipping brace, then remove this before turning the rotor over or starting the machine
up.
Make sure that the resting position of the roller bearings after the rotor has been turned over
is different from what it previously had been. Use the fitted key or the coupling halves as
reference markers.
● During re-commissioning, refer to the information in the "Commissioning" section.
Operation
8.6 Switching on again after an emergency switching-off
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 99
See also
Commissioning (Page 87)
8.8 Decommissioning the machine
NOTICE
Damage as a result of an extended period out of service
If the machine is going to be out of service for longer than six months, then take the necessary
measures for preservation and storing. Otherwise damage to the machine will result.
Record the decommissioning steps. This log will be useful upon recommissioning.
8.9 Re-commissioning the machine
When you re-commission the machine, proceed as follows:
● Study the record made when the machine was decommissioned, and reverse the measures
that were taken for conservation and storage.
● Perform the measures listed in the "Commissioning" section.
See also
Commissioning (Page 87)
Insulation resistance and polarization index (Page 50)
8.10 Faults
8.10.1 Inspections in the event of faults
Natural disasters or unusual operating conditions, such as overloading or short circuit, are
faults that overload the machine electrically or mechanically.
Immediately perform an inspection after such faults.
Correct the cause of the fault as described in the respective remedial measures section. Repair
any damage to the machine.
Operation
8.8 Decommissioning the machine
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
100 Operating Instructions 01/2019
8.10.2 Electrical faults at force-ventilated motors
Note
When operating the machine with a converter, also refer to the operating instructions of the
frequency converter if electrical faults occur.
Table 8-1 Electrical faults
↓ Motor fails to start
↓ Motor accelerates sluggishly
↓ Humming noise when starting
↓ Humming noise in operation
↓ High temperature rise during no-load operation
↓ High temperature rise under load
↓ High temperature rise of individual winding sections
Possible causes of faults Remedial measures
X X X X Overload Reduce the load.
X Interruption of a phase in the
supply cable
Check frequency converters and supply cables.
X X X X Interruption of a phase in the
supply after switching on
Check frequency converters and supply cables.
X X X X Winding short circuit or phase
short circuit in stator winding
Determine the winding and insulation resistances. Con‐
tact the Service Center.
X Converter output voltage too
high, frequency too low
Check the settings at the frequency converter and per‐
form the automatic motor identification.
X External fan is not running Check the external fan and its connections.
X Wrong direction of rotation of the
external fan
Check the electrical connections to the external fan.
X Reduced air intake Check the air ducts; clean the machine.
8.10.3 Electrical faults at water-cooled motors
Note
When operating the machine with a converter, also refer to the operating instructions of the
frequency converter if electrical faults occur.
Operation
8.10 Faults
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 101
Table 8-2 Electrical faults
↓ Motor fails to start
↓ Motor accelerates sluggishly
↓ Humming noise when starting
↓ Humming noise in operation
↓ High temperature rise during no-load operation
↓ High temperature rise under load
↓ High temperature rise of individual winding sections
Possible causes of faults Remedial measures
X X X X Overload Reduce the load.
X Interruption of a phase in the feeder
cable
Check the frequency converters and feeder cables.
X X X X Interruption of a phase in the feeder
cable after switching on
Check the frequency converters and feeder cables.
X X X X Winding short circuit or interphase
short circuit in stator winding
Determine the winding and insulation resistances.
Contact the Service Center.
X Converter output voltage too high,
frequency too low
Check the settings at the frequency converter and
perform the automatic motor identification.
X X Cooling water not connected
Cooling water supply switched off
Water connection / pipes defective
Check the cooling water connection. Switch on the
cooling water supply.
Find the leak and seal it. Contact the Service Center.
X X Cooling water flow rate too low
Intake temperature too high
Increase the cooling water flow rate.
Set the correct intake temperature.
8.10.4 Mechanical faults
The following table shows the possible causes of and remedial measures for mechanical faults.
Table 8-3 Mechanical faults
↓ Grinding noise
↓ Overheating
↓ Radial vibrations
↓ Axial vibrations
Possible causes of faults Remedial measures
X Rotating parts are grinding Establish the cause and realign the parts.
X Rotor not balanced Decouple the rotor and then rebalance it.
X Rotor out of true, shaft bent Contact the Service Center.
X X Poor alignment Align the machine set and check the coupling. 1)
X Coupled machine not balanced Rebalance the coupled machine.
X Shocks from coupled machine Examine the coupled machine.
X X Resonance of the overall system comprising mo‐
tor and foundation
Reinforce the foundation after prior consultation with the
Service Center.
X X Changes in foundation Determine the cause of the changes and, if necessary,
rectify. Realign the machine.
Operation
8.10 Faults
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
102 Operating Instructions 01/2019
↓ Grinding noise
↓ Overheating
↓ Radial vibrations
↓ Axial vibrations
Possible causes of faults Remedial measures
X Reduced air supply, direction of rotation of fan
possibly incorrect
Check the air ducts; clean the machine.
X X Uneven gearbox operation Resolve any gearbox faults.
1) Take into account possible changes which may occur during overheating.
8.10.5 Roller bearing faults
Damage to roller bearings can be difficult to detect in some cases. If in doubt, replace the
bearing. Use other bearing designs only after consulting the manufacturer.
Table 8-4 Roller bearing faults
↓ Bearing overheats
↓ Bearing "whistles"
↓ Bearing "knocks"
Possible causes of faults Remedial measures
X High coupling pressure Align the machine more accurately.
X Belt tension too high Reduce the drive belt tension.
X Bearing contaminated Clean or replace the bearing. Check the seals.
X High ambient temperature Use a suitable high-temperature grease.
X X Insufficient lubrication Grease the bearings as instructed.
X X Bearing canted Properly install the bearing.
X X Insufficient bearing play Contact the Service Center.
X Excessive bearing play Contact the Service Center.
X X Bearing corroded Replace the bearing. Check the seals.
X Too much grease in bearing Remove surplus grease.
X Wrong grease in the bearing Use the correct grease.
X Friction marks on raceway Replace the bearing.
X Brinelling or scoring Replace the bearing. Avoid any vibration at standstill
8.10.6 Holding brake faults
Information on holding brake faults can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions in
the (Page 169) appendix.
Operation
8.10 Faults
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 103
Operation
8.10 Faults
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
104 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Maintenance 9
Through careful and regular maintenance, inspections, and overhauls you can detect faults at
an early stage and resolve them. This means that you can avoid consequential damage.
Operating conditions and characteristics can vary widely. For this reason, only general
maintenance intervals can be specified here. Maintenance intervals should therefore be
scheduled to suit the local conditions (dirt, starting frequency, load, etc.).
Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine:
● Comply with the general safety instructions (Page 15)
● Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations at the place of
installation
● When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid
down in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment.
Note
Please contact the service center (Page 161), if you require support with service, maintenance
or repair.
9.1 Observe the operating instructions of the components
When carrying out any maintenance and repair work, always carefully observe the
manufacturer's operating instructions for additional components.
See also
Operating instructions, holding brake (Page 169)
Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK180 (Page 249)
Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK225 (Page 263)
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 105
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
9.2.1 Safety instructions for inspection and maintenance
Danger as a result of stationary parts under voltage (live parts)
Live parts represent a hazard. Touch protection against active (live) parts is no longer
guaranteed if covers are removed. The minimum air and creepage distances may be fallen
below (violated) when coming close to active parts. Touching or coming close can result in
death, serious injury or material damage.
● Take the machine out of operation.
● Switch off the machine and ensure that it is in a no-voltage condition. Carefully comply with
the "5 safety rules".
● Only open the terminal box when the motor is stationary and in a no voltage condition.
Risk of injury due to rotating parts
Rotating parts are dangerous. Touch protection against rotating parts is no longer guaranteed
if covers are removed. Touching rotating parts can result in death, serious injury or material
damage.
● Before carrying out any repair work on the machine, take it out of operation, and carefully
lock it out so that it cannot be switched on again.
● Only remove the covers when the rotating parts have come to a complete standstill.
Risk of burn injuries due to hot surfaces
In operation, the temperature of individual machine parts can increase - and only decrease
slowly after switching off. You can burn yourself if you touch hot surfaces.
● Allow the machine to cool before starting any maintenance and service work on the machine.
● Check the temperature of parts before touching them. If required, wear suitable protective
equipment.
Damage if the machine is not maintained
The machine can be damaged if it is not appropriately maintained. This can cause faults which
can result in eventual or immediate death, serious injury or material damage.
● Maintain the machine at the specified maintenance intervals.
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
106 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Damage from foreign bodies in the machine
Foreign bodies such as dirt, tools or loose components can be left by accident inside the
machine after maintenance is performed. These can cause short circuits, reduce the
performance of the cooling system or increase noise in operation. They can also damage the
motor.
● Ensure that no foreign bodies are left in or on the motor.
● Securely attach all loose parts once you have completed the work.
● Carefully remove any dirt.
9.2.2 Inspections in the event of faults
Natural disasters or unusual operating conditions, such as overloading or short circuit, are
faults that overload the machine electrically or mechanically.
Immediately perform an inspection after such faults.
9.2.3 Initial inspection
Perform the following checks after approximately 500 operating hours or at the latest after six
months:
Table 9-1 Checks after installation or repair
Check When the
motor is
running
At stand‐
still
The electrical parameters are maintained. X
The smooth running characteristics and machine running noise have not
deteriorated.
X
The motor foundation has no cracks and indentations. (*) X X
(*) You can perform these checks while the motor is running or at a standstill.
Additional checks may also be required according to the system-specific conditions.
NOTICE
If you detect any deviations during the inspection, you must rectify them immediately. They
may otherwise damage the motor.
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 107
9.2.4 Main inspection
Table 9-2 Checks that must be performed during the main inspection
Checking When the
motor is
running
At stand‐
still
The stated electrical characteristics are being observed X
The smooth running characteristics and machine running noise have not
deteriorated
X
The foundation has no cracks or indentations. (*) X X
The motor is aligned within the permissible tolerance range.
All the fixing bolts/screws for the mechanical and electrical connections have
been securely tightened
X
The winding insulation resistances are sufficiently high. X
Any bearing insulation has been fitted as shown on plates and labeling. X
Cables and insulating parts and components are in good condition and there
is no evidence of discoloring
X
Condensation can freely flow away. X
(*) You can perform these checks while the motor is running or at a standstill.
NOTICE
Deviations from the normal state
If you detect any defects or malfunctions during the inspection, you must rectify them
immediately. They may otherwise cause damage to the machine.
See also
Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index (Page 51)
9.2.5 Regreasing intervals
NOTICE
Damage to roller bearings
The regreasing intervals for roller bearings are different from the servicing intervals for the
machine. Failure to regrease the rolling-contact bearings at the specified intervals can result
in them sustaining damage.
● Comply with the regreasing intervals for roller bearings. The regreasing intervals are
specified on the lubricant plate.
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
108 Operating Instructions 01/2019
9.2.6 Changing bearings when using permanently lubricated rolling-contact bearings
The replacement of the permanently lubricated roller bearing is determined by the number of
operating hours and is required around every three years.
9.2.7 Maintenance
When carrying out any work on the machine, observe the general safety instructions (Page 15)
and the specifications contained in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical
equipment.
9.2.7.1 Measuring the insulation resistance during the course of maintenance work
Measuring the insulation resistance and polarization index (PI) provides information on the
condition of the machine. It is therefore important to check the insulation resistance and the
polarization index at the following times:
● Before starting up a machine for the first time
● After an extended period in storage or downtime
● Within the scope of maintenance work
The following information is provided regarding the state of the winding insulation:
● Is the winding head insulation conductively contaminated?
● Has the winding insulation absorbed moisture?
As such, you can determine whether the machine needs commissioning or any necessary
measures such as cleaning and/or drying the winding:
● Can the machine be put into operation?
● Must the windings be cleaned or dried?
Detailed information on testing and the limit values can be found here:
"Testing the insulation resistance and polarization index" (Page 51)
9.2.7.2 Maintenance intervals
Perform the following maintenance measures after the operating time or the intervals specified
in the following table elapse.
Table 9-3 Maintenance measures
Maintenance measures Maintenance intervals
Initial inspection After 500 operating hours, at the latest after six months
Regreasing See the lubricant plate
Permanent lubrication (with coupling
output)
Replace bearings after approximately 20,000 operating hours,
at the latest after three years
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 109
Maintenance measures Maintenance intervals
Cleaning Depending on the degree of pollution
Main inspection After approximately 16,000 operating hours, at the latest after
two years
9.2.7.3 Rolling-contact bearings
The motors have rolling-contact bearing bushes for grease lubrication. Depending on the
version, the motors are permanently lubricated or are equipped with a regreasing device.
Depending on the type of load, a deep-groove ball bearing or a cylindrical-roller bearing is fitted
as a floating bearing on the drive end.
The DE bearing contains built-in compression springs that help to rebalance the axial play of
the external bearing rings.
See also
Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning (Page 89)
9.2.7.4 Lubrication
The specified grease data apply for the data specified on the rating plate data and for high-
quality grease in accordance with the specifications in these operating instructions. These
greases significantly exceed the requirements according to DIN 51825 and ISO 6743‑9,
therefore permitting the specified relubrication intervals.
Initial lubrication
The following greases are used for initial lubrication of the bearings in the factory.
● Standard version: ESSO / Unirex N3
● "Performance" version: Lubcon / Sintono GPE702
Grease selection criteria
The following greases are permissible for standard applications without any special
requirements:
● High quality ISO‑L‑X BDEA3 greases according to ISO 6743-9
● K3N‑20 greases according to DIN 51825 with lithium soap as thickener and an upper
service temperature of at least +140 °C / +284 °F.
When selecting the lubricating grease, ensure that the technical data of the grease is suitable
for the application.
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
110 Operating Instructions 01/2019
The lubricating grease must satisfy the criteria listed in the table below and must match the
operating conditions. If different special lubricating greases are stated on the lubricant plate,
then different criteria apply.
Table 9-4 Criteria for selecting roller bearing greases
Criteria Standard Property, characteristic value Unit
Type of base oil - Mineral oil -
Thickener - Lithium -
Consistency according to NLGI class DIN 51818 ● 3 for vertical and horizontal types of construction
● 2 alternatively for horizontal type of construction
with reduced lubrication interval
-
Worked penetration DIN ISO 2137 220–295 0.1 mm
Operating temperature range - At least -20 °C ... +140 °C °C
Dropping point DIN ISO 2176 At least +200 °C °C
Basic oil viscosity DIN 51562-1 ● Approx. 100 mm²/s at 40° C
● Approx. 10 mm²/s at 100 °C
mm²/s
Additive - ● Antioxidation (AO), Anti-Wear (AW)
● No solid lubricants
● Alternatively: Extreme-Pressure (EP) only after
consultation with grease and bearing
manufacturers
-
FE9 test: A/1500/6000 DIN 51821-1/-2 F10 ≥ 50 h at +140 °C
F50 ≥ 100 h at +140 °C
h
Behavior with respect to water DIN 51807 0 or 1 at a test temperature of +90 °C -
Corrosive effect on copper DIN 51811 0 or 1 at a test temperature of +140 °C Corr.°
Resistance to corrosion (EMCOR) DIN 51802 /
ISO 11007
0 - 0 (0 - 1, permissible for special greases) Corr.°
Solid matter content, particle sizes
> 25 μm
DIN 51813 < 10 mg/kg mg/kg
Suitability of bearings
Speed characteristic value nxdm
- Suitable for the built-in motor bearings, seals and
these speeds
-
mm/min
NOTICE
Other ambient temperatures and operating conditions
For other ambient temperatures and operating conditions, an alternative grease to the one
stated on the lubricant plate may only be used after prior consultation with the manufacturer.
Otherwise the roller bearing could be damaged.
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 111
NOTICE
Use of other greases
If other greases are used, compatibility with the overall system cannot be guaranteed.
Otherwise the roller bearing could be damaged.
If you use greases that satisfy only the minimum requirements of DIN 51825 or ISO 6743-9,
then reduce the lubrication intervals by half or appropriately adapt them. If in doubt, consult the
manufacturer.
Recommended greases for roller bearings
For standard applications, the following high-quality greases are recommended for roller
bearings for vertical and horizontal motor types of construction due to their technical attributes:
Table 9-5 Roller bearing greases for vertical and horizontal types of construction
Manufacturer Grease type
ExxonMobil Unirex N3
Esso
Fuchs Renolit H443 HD88
Lubcon Turmoplex 3
FAG Arcanol Multi 3
For motors with a horizontal type of construction, you can alternatively use greases with NLGI
Class 2. However, the lubrication interval is reduced by 20 %.
Table 9-6 Alternative greases with NLGI Class 2 for motors with a horizontal type of construction
Manufacturer Grease type
ExxonMobil Unirex N2
Esso
Castrol Longtime PD2
Lubcon Turmogrease L 802 EP plus
Shell Retinax LX2
FAG Arcanol Multi 2
For the "Performance" version, only use these special greases. The Performance version is not
available for explosion-protected motors.
Table 9-7 Grease for the "Performance" version
Manufacturer Grease type
Lubcon Sintono GPE702
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
112 Operating Instructions 01/2019
NOTICE
Damage caused by mixing lubrication types
Mixing different greases adversely affects the lubricating properties. Only the manufacturer
provides a guarantee as to whether certain greases can be mixed.
● Never mix different greases.
Regreasing
Regreasing data are stamped on the lubricant plate of the machine:
● Relubrication intervals in operating hours
● Regreasing amount in grams
● Grease type
Regrease the bearing at the latest every 12 months irrespective of the actual number of
operating hours.
NOTICE
Relubrication intervals
The relubrication intervals for roller bearings are different from the servicing intervals for the
machine. The roller bearings may be damaged if the relubrication intervals are not complied
with.
● Pay attention to the instructions on the lubricant plate.
Grease replacement intervals
The grease replacement intervals in these operating instructions or the relubrication intervals
indicated on the plate apply for the following conditions:
● Normal load
● Operation at speeds in accordance with the rating plate
● Low-vibration operation
● Neutral ambient air
● High-quality roller bearing greases
In the case of unfavorable conditions, reduce the relubrication intervals after prior consultation
with the manufacturer.
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 113
Regreasing
While regreasing, the shaft must rotate so that the new grease is evenly distributed throughout
the bearing. For motors that are be operated with a converter, regreasing should be carried out
at low-to-medium speeds (nmin = 250 rpm, nmax = 3600 rpm) to ensure an even distribution of
grease. This ensures adequate even lubrication.
WARNING
Rotating parts
When regreasing, pay attention to all rotating components. This can result in death, serious
injury or material damage.
1. Clean the grease nipple before regreasing. Gradually press in an appropriate type and
amount of grease, as stamped on the lubricant plate and specified in these operating
instructions.
The roller bearing temperature initially increases noticeably. After the excess grease has
been displaced out of the bearing, the temperature will return to the normal value.
The used grease collects outside each bearing in a spent grease chamber.
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
114 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Lubricating using the regreasing system
A flat grease nipple in accordance with DIN 3404, size M10x1, is provided at both the DE ① and
the NDE ② for regreasing.
1. Clean the grease nipples at the DE and NDE.
2. Press in the type and quantity of grease specified (see lubrication instruction plate). The
shaft rotates so that the new grease is evenly distributed throughout the bearing.
The bearing temperature initially increases noticeably. After the excess grease has been
displaced out of the bearing, the temperature will return to the normal value.
Figure 9-1 Flat grease nipples ① and ②, schematic representation for types 1PH818. and
1PH822.
Figure 9-2 Flat grease nipple ① and ② (schematic representation for type 1PH828.)
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 115
9.2.7.5 Cleaning the spent grease chamber
The rolling-contact bearing's spent grease chamber only has room for a limited amount of spent
grease. When the spent grease chamber is full, the spent grease must be removed, otherwise
it will penetrate into the interior of the machine. The information on the amount of grease to be
used when regreasing can be found on the lubricant plate. When changing the bearings
remove the spent grease that has collected in the spent grease chamber and in the outer
bearing cover.
To remove the spent grease, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the transmission element.
2. Remove the spent grease:
– At the DE, unscrew the outer bearing cover and empty the spent grease from the outer
bearing cover.
– At the NDE, remove the cover of the speed sensor and the cover of the spent grease
chamber. Empty the spent grease chamber.
Note
For types 1PH818. and 1PH822., you must remove the fan before removing the speed
encoder cover. At the NDE, remove the fan and then the speed encoder cover.
9.2.7.6 Maintaining the cooling water system
The cooling water pipe system, made of high-grade steel, is maintenance-free if the required
coooling water quality (Page 29) is maintained.
9.2.7.7 Servicing the external fan
● Check the external fan every 12 months for mechanical vibration as specified in DIN ISO
10816. The maximum permissible vibrational severity is 2.8 mm/s measured at the fan
housing.
● Regularly clean and inspect the fan. Impeller and frame are subject to natural wear
depending on the area of application and displacement medium.
WARNING
Impeller can crack
Due to deposits and the resulting imbalance there is a hazard of fatigue fracture of the
impeller. The impeller can crack in operation. Death, serious injury, or material damage
can result.
● Regularly clean and inspect the fan.
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
116 Operating Instructions 01/2019
WARNING
Voltages at the internal motor connections
The motor may continue running, e.g. due to airflow, or may run on after being shut down. This
means that dangerous voltages of over 50 V can occur at the internal motor connections.
Death, serious injury, or material damage can result.
● For safety reasons, it is not permissible to make any unauthorized modifications or
changes to the fan.
● The external fan can automatically switch on and switch off as a result of its inherent
function.
● After a power failure or when the power has been disconnected, the external fan starts up
automatically again when the voltage is restored.
● Wait until the external fan has come to a standstill before approaching it.
● Provide a protective circuit that prevents the main motor from being switched on when the
external fan is not in operation.
Clean the external fan
WARNING
Danger of shearing
Death, severe injury and material damage can occur if you come into contact with the rotating
fan impeller.
● The fan impeller must be stationary when carrying out any work on the external cooling
system.
● Interrupt/disconnect the external cooling unit circuit.
● Lock out the circuit so that it cannot be switched on again.
NOTICE
Applying force
If excessive forces are present, this can damage the fan impeller.
● Use a suitable cloth or brush to clean the external fan, ensuring that moisture does not enter
the motor.
● Once the voltage has been disconnected on all poles, wait for five minutes before touching
the device.
● Never open the external cooling unit during operation.
● Never loosen any fixing screws for the external cooling unit during operation.
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 117
Changing the filter mat of the external fan (option)
Check the state of the filter mat regularly depending on the prevailing conditions. Change it if
it is dirty.
CAUTION
Changing the filter only when the fan is stationary
When the mesh is removed, the degree of protection is no longer guaranteed. There is a risk
of injury. Only change the filter when the fan is stationary.
1. Unscrew the fan guard and remove the old filter mat.
2. Insert the new filter mats and screw the fan guard back into position.
You can order the filter mat as a spare part.
● Spare parts, external fan (Page 145)
● Spare parts kits (Page 133)
● Ordering spare parts via the Internet (Page 134)
9.2.7.8 Maintaining terminal boxes
Requirement
The machine is de-energized.
Checking the terminal box
● Terminal boxes must be regularly checked for tightness, undamaged insulation, and tight
terminal connections.
● If dust or humidity have infiltrated the terminal box, this should be cleaned and dried
(particularly the insulators).
Check all the seals and sealing surfaces and address the cause of the leakiness.
● Check the insulators, connectors and cable connections in the terminal box.
● Replace the damaged components if necessary.
WARNING
Short-circuit hazard
Damaged components can cause short circuits, possibly resulting in death, serious injuries
and property damage.
Replace damaged components.
Maintenance
9.2 Inspection and maintenance
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
118 Operating Instructions 01/2019
9.3 Repair
Observe the following when carrying out any work on the machine:
● Comply with the general safety instructions.
● Comply with the applicable national and sector-specific regulations.
● When using the machine within the European Union, comply with the specifications laid
down in EN 50110‑1 regarding safe operation of electrical equipment.
See also
Safety information (Page 15)
Note
If the motor has to be transported, please observe the information and instructions in
the "Transport" (Page 36) section.
9.3.1 Prepare servicing work
● The drawings and parts lists do not contain any detailed information about the type and
dimensions of fixing elements and components. For this reason, you should establish this
information when dismantling them and make a note of it for the purpose of reassembly.
● Document the type, dimensions and arrangement of the parts so that you will be able to
reassemble the machine to its original state.
● Use suitable tools to disassemble the machine.
● Take measures to prevent parts from dropping down before you dismantle them, e.g. by
replacing fastening elements with extra-long screws, threaded bolts or similar. This ensures
that the part is supported after it is pulled off.
● The centerings in the shaft extensions have reset threads. Use lifting gear which is suitable
for the rotor weight and direction of loading.
WARNING
Rotor can fall down
Eyebolts in accordance with DIN 580 are unsuitable for suspending the rotor. The rotor can fall
off. This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
Use lifting gear which is suitable for the rotor weight and direction of loading.
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 119
WARNING
Machine damage caused by improper repair work
Improper servicing work can damage the machine. This can cause damages and/or faults
which can result in eventual or immediate death, serious injury, or property damage.
● Properly assemble or disassemble the machine.
● Use only suitable tools and equipment.
● Immediately replace damaged components.
● Contact the Service Center (Page 161), if necessary.
9.3.2 Screws with preCOTE coating
The motor can partly be fitted with screws with preCOTE coating. To ensure screw locking, use
new screws with preCOTE coating during assembly/repair. As an alternative, use normal
screws with a threadlocker such as Loctite.
9.3.3 Disassembling a water-cooled motor
The drawings and parts lists do not contain any detailed information about the type and
dimensions of fixing elements, etc.
NOTICE
Removing centered parts
Centered parts can be damaged if removed improperly with unsuitable tools.
Use pullers or suitable devices to remove parts and components attached to the motor shaft.
Disassembly
1. Unscrew the water pipes.
2. Ensure you do not damage insulation when dismantling the device. Check the insulation for
possible damage prior to re-installing.
3. To disassemble the motor, disconnect the connecting cables from the terminals and the
entry plate from the terminal box housing.
In this way, the respective positioning of the cables in relation to one another and the sealing
of the cables in the cable entries are maintained to a large extent.
4. Remove the cable at the outer grounding terminal
5. Pull out the connector of the speed sensor.
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
120 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Links
The circuit diagram (Page 69) shows the relationships required when connecting to the line
supply.
Component assignment
When dismantling or assembling the bearing pay attention to the proper arrangement of the
components particularly if the bearing is the same size on the DE side and NDE side, for
example:
● Bearing shield
● Bearings
● Corrugated springs
● Covers with different centering length, etc.
See also
Service and Support (Page 161)
9.3.4 Dissembling a force-ventilated motor
The drawings and parts lists do not contain any detailed information about the type and
dimensions of fixing elements, etc.
NOTICE
Removing centered parts
Centered parts can be damaged if removed improperly with unsuitable tools.
Use pullers or suitable devices to remove parts and components attached to the motor shaft.
Disassembly
1. Ensure you do not damage insulation when dismantling the device. Check the insulation for
possible damage prior to re-installing.
2. To disassemble the motor, disconnect the connecting cables from the terminals and the
entry plate from the terminal box housing.
In this way, the respective positioning of the cables in relation to one another and the sealing
of the cables in the cable entries are maintained to a large extent.
3. Remove the connecting cables in the terminal box of the fan motor, and if necessary the
cable on the ground terminal and the cables laid out on the motor.
4. Pull out the connector of the speed sensor.
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 121
Links
The circuit diagram (Page 69) shows the relationships required when connecting to the line
supply.
Component assignment
When dismantling or assembling the bearing pay attention to the proper arrangement of the
components particularly if the bearing is the same size on the DE side and NDE side, for
example:
● Bearing shield
● Bearings
● Compression springs
● Spacer washers,
● Covers with different centering length, etc.
See also
Service and Support (Page 161)
If roller-contact bearings with an insulated design are installed, use roller bearings of the same
type as spare parts. This will prevent any bearing damage being caused by bearing currents.
9.3.5 Removing and installing the protecting ring
The protecting ring acts as an outer bearing seal. It sits on the shaft outside the bearing end
shield.
Disassembly
● Once the coupling is detached, you can remove the protective ring from the shaft. After it has
been removed, the protective ring will be deformed and must be replaced.
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
122 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Assembly
● Push the protecting ring over the end of the shaft.
● For 1PH818. or 1PH822. motors, ensure that the outer collar is placed with a space of 1 mm
from the bearing end shield (detail Z).
ཱ=PP=
Figure 9-3 Fitting the protecting ring
9.3.6 Removing and mounting the bearing shields
1. Unscrew the belt pulleys. The belt pulleys may be jammed or distorted, in which case you
should lever them off carefully.
2. Remove the bearing shield.
– When removing the bearing shields, take care that the windings are not damaged.
– For water-cooled motors, also ensure that the cooling water pipes are not damaged.
For assembly, proceed in reverse order.
WARNING
Lifting using the cooling water pipes
The cooling water pipe system has not been designed so that it can be used to lift the motor.
The machine can fall when lifted. Death, serious injury, or material damage will result.
● Only use the eyebolts on the bearing shields to transport and lift the motor.
9.3.7 Installing and sealing the motor
Strictly ensure the greatest possible care and cleanliness when repairing the machine.
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 123
Mount the machine on an alignment plate. This ensures that the contact surfaces of the motor
feet are all on the same level.
NOTICE
Do not damage windings
Windings protrude from the stator housing and can be damaged when attaching the end
shield. This can damage the motor.
When mounting the end shield, ensure that the windings that project from the stator housing
are not damaged.
Sealing the machine (types 1PH818. and 1PH8225.)
● Clean bare joints between parts before re-assembling (e.g. between enclosures, end
shields and the active parts of bearings).
● Brush the bare joints with the non-hardening sealing agent "Hylomar M".
● Note that these joints between parts (e.g. the sealing gap on the active part of the bearing)
must also be resealed with a suitable, silicone-free sealant during assembly.
● Check the sealing elements fitted (e.g. at the terminal boxes) and replace them if they do not
provide an adequate seal.
● Follow the manufacturer's application and safety instructions when using the sealant.
● Replace parts that are subject to wear such as the adjusting springs.
Installing the bearing inserts
1. First position the parts that must be arranged on the shaft within the bearing.
2. To fit the bearings on the shaft, heat them up to about 80 °C in oil or air.
3. Then push the bearings onto the shaft up to its shoulder. Avoid any heavy blows that might
damage the bearings.
4. Fill the bearing to the top with the specified lubricating grease (Page 110).
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
124 Operating Instructions 01/2019
9.3.8 Sealing the motor (type 1PH828.)
1. When assembling, seal the joints between parts, such as the sealing gap between the
enclosure and bearing shield, using suitable, silicon-free sealing compound.
2. Use joint sealant due to the higher requirements for degree of protection IP55.
Seal the joint ② using a non-hardening sealant, which remains permanently plastic, before
screwing on the bearing shields, for example "Hylomar M".
3. Check all the sealing elements, for example on the terminal box, for elasticity, aging or
damage. Replace any sealing elements if they are no longer fully effective.
ແໂໃໄ
①End shields ③Housing
②Sealing gap ④Protective tube
Figure 9-4 Sealing gap between the enclosure and bearing shields (schematic representation)
Installing the active parts of the bearings
● When installing/replacing the bearing, ensure that an insulated bearing is again installed at
the NDE.
● If radial shaft seals without helical springs are installed, also install the replacement part
without a spring.
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 125
Sealing the bearings
The outer bearing seal comprises a rotary shaft seal.
● When installing the bearings, make sure that the seat of the shaft is not greased.
● The correct axial position of the rotary shaft seal is achieved when the outer edges of the
bearing cap end face ① and rotary shaft seal ② are flush.
ཱི
①Bearing cap end face
②Rotary shaft seal
③Seat of shaft
Figure 9-5 Installing the rotary shaft seal
See also
Installing and sealing the motor (Page 123)
9.3.9 Relocating the external fan (type 1PH828.)
Subsequently moving the external fan from NDE to DE or vice versa must only be carried out
by qualified personnel or a Siemens Service Center (Page 161).
9.3.10 Removing and mounting the external fan
WARNING
Live parts
Contact with live parts can cause death, serious injury or material damage.
1. Before carrying out any maintenance work on the device, disconnect it from the line supply,
particularly before opening the terminal box.
2. Make sure that the device cannot be switched back on.
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
126 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Removing and mounting the external fan
1. Before carrying out any maintenance work on the device, disconnect it from the line supply.
2. Unscrew the screws ① and remove the external fan.
3. For mounting, proceed in reverse order.
Figure 9-6 Unscrewing the external fan (1PH818., 1PH822.)
Figure 9-7 Unscrewing the external fan (1PH828.)
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 127
9.3.11 Removing and mounting the speed sensor
NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic modules contain components that can be seriously damaged by electrostatic
discharge. These modules can easily be destroyed unless they are handled properly.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given in the section
headed "Electrostatic Sensitive Devices" (Page 18).
Preparation
For 1PH818. and 1PH822. motors, the speed encoder can only be removed and replaced if
the external fan (Page 126) has been removed.
ແໂໃໄ
①Shaft ③Speed encoder
②Torque arm ④Encoder cover
Figure 9-8 Detailed view of the speed encoder
1. Unscrew the cover of the speed encoder.
2. Detach the electrical connection.
– Pull the cable carefully out of its holder.
– Pull out the connector.
3. Remove the screwed union connections for the speed encoder from the bearing shield.
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
128 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Separating the speed encoder
The following options are available for the purpose of separating the speed encoder from the
shaft by means of a clamping screw:
Disassembling the speed encoder - Version A
0[0[0[ཱ
1. Remove screw M5x50 (①).
2. Screw in screw M5x10 and screw M6x70 one after the other. This releases the encoder
cone in the motor shaft (②).
3. Remove the speed encoder.
Removing the speed encoder - version B
FDrr0ཱ
1. Loosen the retaining screw (①).
2. Press screw M10 onto the original screw. This will then drop out (②).
3. Remove the speed encoder.
Mounting the speed encoder
1. Screw the torque arm to the speed encoder, tightening the two screws by hand.
2. Use the M5x50 screw to secure the speed encoder over the internal cone, ensuring a
tightening torque of 5 Nm at the shaft extension.
3. Attach the torque arm to the bearing cover with a tightening torque of 3 Nm.
4. Loosen the screws of the torque arm so as to relieve the stress and tighten them crosswise,
with a tightening torque of 0.6 Nm.
5. Establish the electrical connection.
6. Screw on the cover of the speed encoder.
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 129
9.3.12 Connecting the speed encoder
NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic modules contain components that can be seriously damaged by electrostatic
discharge. These modules can easily be destroyed unless they are handled properly.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given in the section
headed "Electrostatic Sensitive Devices" (Page 18).
1. Insert the connector into the socket.
2. Press the cable into the holder provided for it.
3. Screw on the sensor cover. Take care that you do not catch the cable as you screw it in.
ཱི
Figure 9-9 Electrical connection of the speed sensor
9.3.13 Replacing the DRIVE-CLiQ interface (encoder module)
Only trained Siemens service engineers (Page 161) are authorized to replace the DRIVE-CLiQ
interface (sensor module).
NOTICE
Electrostatic discharge
Electronic modules contain components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.
These modules can be easily destroyed by improper handling.
To protect your equipment against damage, follow the instructions given in the chapter ESD
Guidelines (Page 18).
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
130 Operating Instructions 01/2019
WARNING
Motor-specific sensor module
The Sensor Module contains motor-specific and sensor-specific data and an electronic
nameplate.
If you operate a different Sensor Module on the motor, this can result in serious injury or death,
or cause considerable material damage.
Only operate the sensor module on the original motor. Do not install the sensor module on
other motors. Do not replace the sensor module with a sensor module from a different motor.
9.3.14 Touch up any damaged paintwork
If the paint is damaged, it must be repaired in order to protect the unit against corrosion.
Note
Paint system
Contact the Service Center (Page 161) before you repair any paint damage. They will provide
you with more information about the correct paint system and methods of repairing paint
damage.
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 131
Maintenance
9.3 Repair
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
132 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Spare parts 10
10.1 Ordering data
When ordering spare parts, in addition to the precise designation of the spare part, specify the
motor type and the serial number of the motor. Ensure that the spare part designation matches
the designation in the spare part lists and add the associated part number.
Example:
Spare part Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing (Part 3.00)
Machine type 1PH81841JD202FA1
Serial number N-W91246206010001
The machine type and the serial number are indicated on the rating plate and in the technical
data, and are also embossed on the drive end of the shaft.
Note
Bar code on rating plate
You can also read the machine type and serial number from the bar code on the rating plate.
Note
The graphics in this chapter are schematic representations of the basic versions. They are used
for spare parts definitions. The supplied version may differ in details from these representations.
10.2 Spare parts kits
The spare parts are bundled with the necessary wearing parts in a logical way so as to create
spare parts kits.
The following spare parts kits are available for you to order:
3.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bearing (complete)
4.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing (complete)
32.00 Spare parts kit, external fan (only force-ventilated motors)
55.00 Spare parts kit, relevant version of speed encoder
Additional spare parts are available on request.
See also
Service and Support (Page 161)
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 133
Note
DRIVE-CLiQ interface
If you order a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, please specify when ordering from Spares on Web that
the DRIVE-CLiQ interface must be described along with the motor data.
10.3 Holding brake
Contact your Service Center for spare parts for the holding brake.
See also
Operating instructions, holding brake (Page 169)
Rolling bearings
When ordering rolling bearings, in addition to the bearing identification code, the
supplementary specifying code is also necessary for the bearing version. Both of these codes
are stamped on the lubricant plate and specified in the motor documentation, or can also be
taken from the installed bearings.
Always replace the rolling bearings with the identical bearings.
If insulated rolling bearings are fitted, use insulated rolling bearings of the same type as spare
parts. This will prevent any bearing damage being caused by bearing currents.
10.4 Ordering spare parts via the Internet
You can use "Spares on Web" to determine the order numbers for motor
spare parts quickly and easily.
.
See also
Spares on Web (https://www.sow.siemens.com/)
Guide for Spares on Web (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/news/en/25248626)
Spare parts
10.3 Holding brake
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
134 Operating Instructions 01/2019
10.5 Anti-condensation heating
The anti-condensation heater is mounted directly on the winding. The anti-condensation heater
cannot be removed without causing damage to the winding. A new anti-condensation heater
may only be installed by Siemens Service Center (Page 161) specialists.
10.6 Water-cooled motor
10.6.1 Water-cooled motor, complete
Figure 10-1 Schematic diagram of motor (complete)
Table 10-1 Motor, complete
Number Designation Number Designation
3.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bearing 8.00* Rotor, complete
4.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing 10.00* Stator housing (with laminated core,
winding and cooling water pipe system)
55.00 Spare parts kit, speed encoder 10.35* Hoisting lug
5.00* Bearing shield, drive end 20.00* Terminal box
6.00* Bearing shield, non-drive end 99.00* Special built-on parts
* On request
Spare parts
10.5 Anti-condensation heating
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 135
10.6.2 Roller bearing cartridge DE with radial shaft sealing ring with regreasing
Figure 10-2 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing
Table 10-2 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with
regreasing
Number Designation Number Designation
3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(floating bearing)
● Radial shaft sealing ring
● Inner ring
3.60* Inner bearing cover
3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple
3.45* Corrugated spring/compression
springs
* On request
Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
136 Operating Instructions 01/2019
10.6.3 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, belt coupling
Figure 10-3 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing
Table 10-3 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing
Number Designation Number Designation
3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing
● Cylindrical-roller bearing (floating
bearing)
● Protecting ring (rotating)
3.60* Inner bearing cover
3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple
* On request
Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 137
10.6.4 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, coupling output, with regreasing
Figure 10-4 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing
Table 10-4 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing
Number Designation Number Designation
3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(floating bearing)
● Protecting ring (rotating)
3.60* Inner bearing cover
3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple
3.45* Corrugated spring
* On request
Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
138 Operating Instructions 01/2019
10.6.5 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, coupling output, with permanent
lubrication
Figure 10-5 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication
Table 10-5 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent
lubrication
Number Designation
3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing (floating bearing)
● Protecting ring (rotating)
3.45* Corrugated spring/compression springs
* On request
Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 139
10.6.6 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, with permanent lubrication
Figure 10-6 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, permanent lubrication
Table 10-6 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end, permanent lubrication
Number Designation
4.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing (locating bearing)
● Retaining ring
4.60* Inner bearing cover
* On request
Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
140 Operating Instructions 01/2019
10.6.7 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)
Figure 10-7 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)
Table 10-7 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)
Number Designation Number Designation
4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(locating bearing)
● Retaining ring
4.80* Grease nipple
4.60* Inner bearing cover 4.90* Cover of spent grease chamber
* On request
Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 141
10.6.8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)
Figure 10-8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)
Table 10-8 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)
Number Designation Number Designation
4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(locating bearing)
● Retaining ring
4.80* Grease nipple
4.60* Inner bearing cover
* On request
Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
142 Operating Instructions 01/2019
10.6.9 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end "Performance"
Figure 10-9 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing
Table 10-9 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing
Number Designation Number Designation
4.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bear‐
ing
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(locating bearing)
● Shrink ring
4.80* Grease nipple
4.60* Inner bearing cover 4.90* Cover of spent grease chamber
* On request
Spare parts
10.6 Water-cooled motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 143
10.7 Force-ventilated motor
10.7.1 Force-ventilated motor, complete
Figure 10-10 Schematic representation of the motor, complete
Table 10-10 Motor, complete
Number Designation Number Designation
3.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing 10.00* Stator housing (with laminated core
and winding)
4.00 Spare parts kit, DE bearing 10.35* Eyebolt
5.00* Bearing shield, DE 20.00* Terminal box
6.00* Bearing shield, NDE 32.00 External fan
8.00* Rotor, complete 55.10 Spare parts kit, speed encoder
* On request
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
144 Operating Instructions 01/2019
10.7.2 External fan
Figure 10-11 Spare parts for external fan (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)
Table 10-11 Spare parts for external fan
Part Description Part Description
32.00 Fan 34.31 External grill cover
34.21 Filter element * 34.33 Inside basket
* Option for type 1PH828.
10.7.3 External fan (option L75)
The external fan for option L75 can only be ordered as a part. Contact the Service Center, if
necessary.
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 145
10.7.4 Roller bearing cartridge DE with radial shaft sealing ring with regreasing
Figure 10-12 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with regreasing
Table 10-12 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with mounted gearing, with
regreasing
Number Designation Number Designation
3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(floating bearing)
● Radial shaft sealing ring
● Inner ring
3.60* Inner bearing cover
3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple
3.45* Corrugated spring/compression
springs
* On request
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
146 Operating Instructions 01/2019
10.7.5 Roller bearing cartridge DE, belt coupling
Figure 10-13 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing
Table 10-13 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end with belt coupling, with regreasing
Number Designation Number Designation
3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing
● Cylindrical-roller bearing (floating
bearing)
● Protecting ring (rotating)
3.60* Inner bearing cover
3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple
* On request
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 147
10.7.6 Roller bearing cartridge DE, coupling output, with regreasing
Figure 10-14 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing
Table 10-14 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with regreasing
Number Designation Number Designation
3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(floating bearing)
● Protecting ring (rotating)
3.60* Inner bearing cover
3.20* Outer bearing cover 3.80* Grease nipple
3.45* Corrugated spring
* On request
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
148 Operating Instructions 01/2019
10.7.7 Roller bearing cartridge DE, coupling output, with permanent lubrication
Figure 10-15 Rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent lubrication
Table 10-15 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush drive end, with coupling output, with permanent
lubrication
Number Designation
3.00 Spare parts kit, drive-end bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing (floating bearing)
● Protecting ring (rotating)
3.45* Corrugated spring/compression springs
* On request
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 149
10.7.8 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with permanent lubrication
Figure 10-16 Roller bearing cartridge, non-drive end, permanent lubrication
Table 10-16 Spare parts for roller bearing cartridge, non-drive end, permanent lubrication
Number Designation
4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing (locating bearing)
● Retaining ring
4.60* Inner bearing cover
* On request
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
150 Operating Instructions 01/2019
10.7.9 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)
Figure 10-17 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)
Table 10-17 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)
Number Designation Number Designation
4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(locating bearing)
● Retaining ring
4.80* Grease nipple
4.60* Inner bearing cover 4.90* Cover of spent grease chamber
* On request
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 151
10.7.10 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)
Figure 10-18 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)
Table 10-18 Spare part, roller bearing cartridge NDE, with regreasing (type 1PH828.)
Number Designation Number Designation
4.00 Spare parts kit, NDE bearing
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(locating bearing)
● Retaining ring
4.80* Grease nipple
4.60* Inner bearing cover
* On request
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
152 Operating Instructions 01/2019
10.7.11 Roller bearing cartridge NDE, "Performance"
Figure 10-19 Rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing
Table 10-19 Spare parts for rolling-contact bearing bush non-drive end with regreasing
Number Designation Number Designation
4.00 Spare parts kit, non-drive-end bear‐
ing
● Deep-groove ball bearing
(locating bearing)
● Shrink ring
4.80* Grease nipple
4.60* Inner bearing cover 4.90* Cover of spent grease chamber
* On request
Spare parts
10.7 Force-ventilated motor
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 153
10.8 Terminal box
Figure 10-20 Terminal box
Table 10-20 Spare parts for terminal box
Number Designation Number Designation
20.20* Enclosure 20.50* Entry plate
20.30* Cover 20.60* Adapter plate (optional)
* On request
Spare parts
10.8 Terminal box
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
154 Operating Instructions 01/2019
10.9 Speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)
Figure 10-21 Speed encoder
Table 10-21 Spare part, speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)
Part Description
55.00 Spare parts kit, speed encoder
● Speed encoder
● Torque arm
55.71 Cable with plug connector
6.80* Cover
* On request
Spare parts
10.9 Speed encoder (type 1PH818., 1PH822.)
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 155
10.10 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.)
Figure 10-22 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.)
Table 10-22 Spare part, speed encoder (type 1PH828.)
Part Description Part Description
6.80 Cover 55.63 Torque arm
55.12 Speed encoder 55.71 Cable with plug connector
Spare parts
10.10 Speed encoder (type 1PH828.)
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
156 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Disposal 11
Protecting the environment and preserving its resources are corporate goals of the highest
priority for us. Our worldwide environmental management system to ISO 14001 ensures
compliance with legislation and sets high standards in this regard. Environmentally friendly
design, technical safety and health protection are always firm goals even at the product
development stage.
Recommendations for the environmentally friendly disposal of the machine and its components
are given in the following section. Be sure to comply with local disposal regulations.
Country-specific legislation
The machine uses materials that can be recovered or recycled. Correctly separating materials
helps to simply recycle important materials.
● When disposing of the machine or of waste that is created during the individual phases of
its life cycle, please observe the statutory requirements applicable in the country of use.
● Please contact your local authorities for more information about disposal.
11.1 RoHS - restricting the use of certain hazardous substances
In compliance with RoHS ("Restriction of certain Hazardous Substances" ) we replace
substances that are damaging to the environment by those that are not based on state-of-the-
art technology. In doing so, safety in operation and handling will take priority at all times.
11.2 Information according to Article 33 of the REACH regulation
This product contains one or several subproducts in which the following substance – belonging
to the "list of candidates" – exists in a concentration exceeding 0.1 percent by weight.
● CAS No. 7439-92-1, lead
Based on the currently available information, we assume that this substance does not
represent any risk when correctly used, including its disposal.
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 157
11.3 Preparing for disassembly
Disassembly of the machine must be carried out and/or supervised by qualified personnel with
appropriate expert knowledge.
1. Contact a certified waste disposal organization in your vicinity. Clarify what is expected in
terms of the quality of dismantling the machine and provision of the components.
2. Follow the five safety rules (Page 15).
3. Disconnect all electrical connections and remove all cables.
4. Remove all liquids such as oil and cooling liquids. Collect the liquids separately and dispose
of them in a professional manner.
5. Detach the machine fixings.
6. Transport the machine to a suitable location for disassembly.
See also
Maintenance (Page 105)
11.4 Dismantling the machine
Dismantle the machine using the general procedures commonly used in mechanical
engineering.
WARNING
Machine parts can fall
The machine is made up of heavy parts. These parts are liable to fall during dismantling. This
can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Before you release any machine parts, secure them so that they cannot fall.
11.5 Disposal of components
Components
The machines consist mainly of steel and various proportions of copper and aluminum. Metals
are generally considered to be unlimitedly recyclable.
Sort the components for recycling according to whether they are:
● Iron and steel
● Aluminum
● Non-ferrous metal, e.g. windings
The winding insulation is incinerated during copper recycling.
● Insulating materials
Disposal
11.3 Preparing for disassembly
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
158 Operating Instructions 01/2019
● Cables and wires
● Electronic waste
Process materials and chemicals
Sort the process materials and chemicals for recycling according to whether they are for
example:
● Oil
● Grease
● Cleaning substances and solvents
● Paint residues
● Anti-corrosion agent
● Coolant additives such as inhibitors, antifreeze or biocides
Dispose of the separated components according to local regulations or via a specialist disposal
company. The same applies for cloths and cleaning substances which have been used while
working on the machine.
Packaging material
● If necessary, contact a suitable specialist disposal company.
● Wooden packaging for sea transport consists of impregnated wood. Observe the local
regulations.
● The foil used for water-proof packaging is an aluminum composite foil. It can be recycled
thermally. Dirty foil must be disposed of via waste incineration.
Disposal
11.5 Disposal of components
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 159
Disposal
11.5 Disposal of components
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
160 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Service and Support A
* Based on the serial number stamped on the rating plate, you can identify where the machine
was manufactured and where you can have your questions answered:
● No:N... = Nuremberg
● No.UC... = Frenstat
See also
Description (Page 21)
More information
Information on the following topics is available at:
● Ordering documentation / overview of documentation
● Additional links to download documents
● Using documentation online (find and search in manuals / information)
More information (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/en/view/108998034)
If you have any questions regarding the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions,
corrections), please send an e-mail to the following address E-mail
(mailto:docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com).
My support
The following link provides information on how to create your own individual documentation
based on Siemens content, and adapt it for your own machine documentation:
My support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/My/de/en/documentation)
Note
If you want to use this function, you must first register.
Later, you can log on with your login data.
Training
The following link provides information on SITRAIN - training from Siemens for products,
systems and automation engineering solutions:
SITRAIN (http://siemens.com/sitrain)
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 161
Technical Support
Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided on the Internet under
Contact:
Technical Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com)
Websites of third parties
This publication contains hyperlinks to websites of third parties. Siemens does not take any
responsibility for the contents of these websites or adopt any of these websites or their contents
as their own, because Siemens does not control the information on these websites and is also
not responsible for the contents and information provided there. Use of these websites is at the
risk of the person doing so.
Internet address for products
Products (http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol)
Siemens Support for on the move
With the "Siemens Industry Online Support" App, you can access more than
300,000 documents for Siemens Industry products – any time and any‐
where. The App supports you in the following areas:
● Resolving problems when executing a project
● Troubleshooting when faults develop
● Expanding a system or planning a new system
Further, you have access to the Technical Forum and other articles that our
experts have drawn-up:
● FAQs
● Application examples
● Manuals
● Certificates
● Product announcements and many more
The app is available for Apple iOS, Android and Windows Phone.
Service and Support
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
162 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Technical specifications B
B.1 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections
Bolt locking devices
● Refit nuts or bolts that are mounted together with locking, resilient, and/or force-distributing
elements with identical, fully-functional elements when re-assembling. Always renew keyed
elements.
● When screwing together threads secured with a liquid adhesive, use a suitable medium
such as Loctite 243.
● Always use suitable securing devices or removable adhesives (e.g., Loctite 243) when
installing fixing bolts with a clamping length of less than 25 mm. The clamping length is taken
as the distance between the head of the bolt and the point at which the bolt is screwed in.
Tightening torques
The bolted connections with metal contact surfaces, such as end shields, bearing cartridge
parts, terminal box parts bolted onto the stator frame, should be tightened to the following
torques, depending on the thread size:
Table B-1 Tightening torques for bolted connections with a tolerance of ±10%.
Case M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24 M30 M36 M42 M48 M56
A1.2 2.5 4 8 13 20 40 52 80 150 - - - - Nm
B1.3 2.6 4.5 11 22 38 92 180 310 620 1080 1700 2600 4200 Nm
C3 5 8 20 40 70 170 340 600 1200 2000 3100 4700 7500 Nm
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 163
Applications
The above-mentioned tightening torques apply for the following applications:
● Case A
Applies to electrical connections in which the permissible torque is normally limited by the
bolt materials and/or the current carrying capacity of the insulators, with the exception of the
busbar connections in case B.
● Case B
Applies to bolts screwed into components made from materials with lower property class
(e. g. aluminum) and to bolts with property class 8.8 according to ISO 898-1.
● Case C
Applies to bolts with property class 8.8, A4-70 or A4-80 according to ISO 898-1, however
only to bolts screwed into components made from materials with higher property class, e.g.
cast iron, steel or cast steel.
Note
Non-standard tightening torques
Different tightening torques for electrical connections and bolted connections for parts with
flat seals or insulating parts are specified in the relevant sections and drawings.
Technical specifications
B.1 Tightening torques for screw and bolt connections
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
164 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Quality documents
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
166 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Additional documents D
D.1 Reader notes on the operating instructions of the holding brake
Holding brake
Depending on the order, a special version of a holding brake from the Stromag company is
mounted. Various types of holding brake are mounted depending on the shaft height.
NOTICE
Technical data for the special version of the holding brake
The following technical data applies to the special version of the mounted holding brake. The
corresponding data in the manufacturers operating instructions do not apply.
Table D-1 Technical data of the holding brake
Technical data NFF-A 63
1PH818. (SH180)
NFF-A 100
1PH822. (SH225)
Braking torque MBrake [Nm] 1000 1600
Max. speed nBrake [rpm] 3500 3100
Weight incl. hollow shaft mbrake [kg] 63 88
Moment of inertia Jbrake [kgm2] 0.022 0.051
Total moment of inertia (emer‐
gency stop)
Jtotal [kgm2] 1.3 3.9
Rated voltage U [V] 230 V (AC) 230 V (AC)
Permitted single switched energy P [W] 98 210
Coil current I [A] 2.21 2.70
Number of emergency stops Z - 2000 1200
Opening time [ms] 300 300
Closing time [ms] 80 100
Note
More information
● Commissioning (Page 87)
See also
Operating instructions, holding brake (Page 169)
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 167
Additional documents
D.1 Reader notes on the operating instructions of the holding brake
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
168 Operating Instructions 01/2019
D.2 Operating instructions, holding brake
Additional documents
D.2 Operating instructions, holding brake
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 169
Additional documents
D.2 Operating instructions, holding brake
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
170 Operating Instructions 01/2019
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
D.3 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction,
SH180
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 193
Additional documents
D.3 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH180
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
194 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110
info1@de.ebmpapst.com
www.ebmpapst.com
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
11. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
danger to persons.
These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
11.1 Hazard levels for warnings
These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
actions are not taken.
NOTE
A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
lead to property damage.
1.2 Staff qualifications
11.2 Staff qualifications
The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
authorized technical staff.
Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
1.3 Basic safety rules
11.3 Basic safety rules
The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
following installation in the final product.
The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be
observed when working on the device.
Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area
increases the risk of accidents.
Note the following when working on the device:
;Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
1.4 Voltage
11.4 Voltage
;Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
;Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.
21.5 Safety and protective features
21.6 Electromagnetic radiation
21.7 Mechanical movement
21.8 Emissions
21.9 Hot surface
21.10 Transport
21.11 Storage
32. INTENDED USE
43. TECHNICAL DATA
43.1 Product drawing
53.2 Nominal data
53.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011
53.4 Technical description
63.5 Mounting data
63.6 Transport and storage conditions
63.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
64. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
64.1 Mechanical connection
64.2 Electrical connection
74.3 Connection in terminal box
84.4 Factory settings
94.5 Connection diagram
104.6 Checking connections
104.7 Switching on the device
104.8 Switching off the device
105. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
106. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
116.1 Vibration testing
116.2 Cleaning
116.3 Safety inspection
116.4 Disposal
Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 1 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
195
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation.
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
1.5 Safety and protective features
DANGER
Protective device missing and protective device not
functioning
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and
guard grille.
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example.
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured
adequately.
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
ineffective protective device.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
with open- and closed-loop control devices.
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate
shielding measures have to be taken by the user.
NOTE
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment.
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant.
1.7 Mechanical movement
DANGER
Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
the impeller.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill.
WARNING
Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
can result.
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
while working on rotating parts.
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
1.8 Emissions
WARNING
Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
→ Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
equipment such as hearing protection.
→ Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
1.9 Hot surface
CAUTION
High temperature on electronics housing
Risk of burns
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
1.10 Transport
NOTE
Transporting the device
→ Transport the device in its original packaging only.
→ Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a
lashing strip.
1.11 Storage
;Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
packaging in a clean environment.
;Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
;We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
service life.
;Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
described prior to commissioning.
;Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
;Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.
Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 2 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
196
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
●The device is only to be used in IT networks with a permissible
maximum voltage of 277 V between the phase conductors.
●Use of the device in stationary systems only.
●Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
●Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
●Operating the device with all protective devices.
●Following the operating instructions.
Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
●Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
●Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
●Opening the terminal box during operation.
●Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
●Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
●Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
●Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
●Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
●Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
●Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
●In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.
Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 3 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
197
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3. TECHNICAL DATA
3.1 Product drawing
All dimensions in mm.
1Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L
1.3 N
1.4 NC
1.5 COM
1.6 GND
1.7 0-10 V
1.8 +10 V
2Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 4 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
198
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3.2 Nominal data
Motor M3G084-DF
Phase 1~
Nominal voltage / VAC 230
Nominal voltage
range / VAC
200 .. 277
Frequency / Hz 50/60
Method of obtaining
data
ml
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2900
Power consumption / W 245
Current draw / A 1.1
Min. ambient
temperature / °C
-25
Max. ambient
temperature / °C
60
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment
Subject to change
Control input 0-10 V / PWM Control range for modulation level 50-100%
Alarm relay activates on warning "Module temperature 101°C"
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/
2011
Actual Req. 2015
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 46.8 43.8
02 Measurement category A
03 Efficiency category Static
04 Efficiency grade N 64 61
05 Variable speed drive Yes
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label.
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
08 Type K3G250-RR03-H4
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.23
09 Air flow qv/ m³/h 705
09 Pressure increase total psf /
Pa
486
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2905
11 Specific ratio*1.01
12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and
maintenance is provided in the operating
instructions.
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
measurement category are detailed in the
CE declaration.
*Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller
combination in a standardized measurement setup.
3.4 Technical description
Weight 11.8 kg
Fan size 250 mm
Rotor surface Painted black
Electronics housing
material
Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Impeller material PA plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
plastic (RAL 9005)
Number of blades 7
Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
Degree of protection IP55
Insulation class "F"
Moisture (F) /
Environmental (H)
protection class
H1
Installation position Any
Condensation
drainage holes
None
Mode S1
Motor bearing Ball bearing
Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
- Operation and alarm display
- Alarm relay
- Integrated PID controller
- Power limiter
- Motor current limitation
- PFC, active
- RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
- Soft start
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
- Control interface with SELV potential
safely disconnected from the mains
- Thermal overload protection for
electronics/motor
- Line undervoltage / phase failure
detection
Touch current
according to IEC
60990 (measuring
circuit Fig. 4, TN
system)
<= 3.5 mA
Electrical hookup Via terminal box
Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
internally connected
Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
customer to the housing's connection point)
Conformity with
standards
EN 61800-5-1; CE
Approval C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1;
EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730
Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 5 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
199
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for
support.
;Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection.
Information on surface quality
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty.
3.5 Mounting data
Strength class of
screws
8.8
;Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self-
locking screws).
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions
Max. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
+80 °C
Min. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
-40 °C
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
EMC immunity to
interference
According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
environment)
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference
emission
According to EN 61000-6-3 (household
environment)
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
4.1 Mechanical connection
CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
from packaging
→ Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
→ Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
CAUTION
Heavy load when unpacking device
Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
→ Two people should work together to remove the device from
its packaging.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
attachment of the fan to the substructure.
;The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
;Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
be installed.
;Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
CAUTION
Possible damage to the device
If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
●The fan must not be strained on fastening.
4.2 Electrical connection
DANGER
Voltage on the device
Electric shock
→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.
Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 6 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
200
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
DANGER
Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
and PE connections.
CAUTION
Voltage
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch.
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being
switched back on.
NOTE
Water ingress into wires or cables
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the
device.
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry
environment.
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
4.2.1 Requirements
;Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data.
;Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches
the device voltage.
;Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the
nameplate.
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor.
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum
cable cross-section is at least
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
;Note the following when routing the cables:
For permanently installed lines, the bending radius must be at least
four times the outside diameter of the cable.
For movable lines, the bending radius must be at least 15 times the
outside diameter of the cable.
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
symbol and a hole.
4.2.2 Reactive currents
Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
on.
●The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
●At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
(operational readiness) is typically < 4 W.
4.2.3 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
(type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
while operating the device. When the device power supply is
switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
4.2.4 Locked-rotor protection
Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
4.3 Connection in terminal box
4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection
Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
NOTE
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
used.
→ This must be checked by the user.
4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
;Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
;Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
box.
;First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
;Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
;Seal the terminal box.
Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 7 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
201
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.3.3 Cable routing
Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.
4.4 Factory settings
Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 10
Save set value to
EEPROM
No
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action
parameter set 1
Positive (heating)
Direction of action
parameter set 2
Positive (heating)
Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 8 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
202
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.5 Connection diagram
Drawing preliminary!
No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment
1 1, 2 PE green/
yellow
Protective earth
1 3 N blue Power supply, neutral conductor, 50/60 Hz
1 5 L black Power supply, phase, 50/60 Hz
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact; break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10
mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact; common connection, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min.
10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value); 0-10 V; Ri = 100 kΩ; adjustable curve
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB
2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA
2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%; max. 10 mA; short-circuit-proof; power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot)
Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 9 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
203
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.6 Checking connections
;Ensure isolation from supply (all phases).
;Make sure a restart is impossible
;Check the cables for proper fit.
;Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
;Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover
closes without resistance.
;Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
the threads.
;Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.
4.7 Switching on the device
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or
similar connectors by the customer.
WARNING
Hot motor housing
Risk of fire
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
located close to the fan.
;Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
;Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any
foreign matter found.
;Apply the nominal supply voltage.
;Start the device by changing the input signal.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be
determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
failure.
4.8 Switching off the device
Switching off the device during operation:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
Switching off the device for maintenance:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
;Disconnect the device from the power supply.
;When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
Fault Safety feature description/
function
Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
Blocked rotor ;After the blockage is
removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
Line undervoltage (line voltage
outside of permitted nominal
voltage range)
;If the line voltage returns to
permitted values, the motor
restarts automatically.
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
papst for repair or replacement.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
Impeller not
running smoothly
Imbalance in rotating
parts
Clean the device;
replace it if imbalance
persists after cleaning.
Make sure no
weight clips are
removed during
cleaning.
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate
from supply and
remove mechanical
blockage.
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage,
restore power
supply, apply control
signal.
Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 10 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
204
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
Faulty connection Isolate from supply,
correct connection;
see connection
diagram.
Thermal overload
protector activated
Allow motor to cool
off, locate and rectify
cause of error,
release restart lockout
if necessary
Motor/electronics
overtemperature
Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let
the device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Ambient temperature
too high
Reduce the ambient
temperature.
Reset by reducing
control input to 0.
Impermissible point of
operation
Correct the operating
point. Let the device
cool down.
In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
6.1 Vibration testing
Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of
the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation
situation.
6.2 Cleaning
NOTE
Damage to the device during cleaning
Malfunction possible
→ Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
→ Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
6.3 Safety inspection
NOTE
High-voltage test
The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
→ Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
the standard.
What to check How to check How often What action?
Contact
protection
cover for
intactness or
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Repair or
replacement of
device
Device for
damage to
blades and
housing
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replacement of
device
Fastening the
cables
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Fastening the
protective earth
terminal
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Insulation of
cables for
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replace cables
Impeller for
wear/deposits/
corrosion and
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Clean impeller
or replace device
Tightness of
cable gland
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Retighten,
replace if
damaged
Abnormal
bearing noise
acoustic At least every
6 months
Replace device
6.4 Disposal
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
top priority corporate goals.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 11 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
205
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.
6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.
6.4.3 Component disposal
The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
●Steel and iron
●Aluminum
●Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
●Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
●Insulating materials
●Cables and wires
●Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
;Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
●Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
●Power cables
●Cables for internal wiring
●Electrolytic capacitors
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.
→ Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
Item no. 55700-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-12 · Page 12 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
206
D.4 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction,
SH225
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 207
Additional documents
D.4 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, suction, SH225
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
208 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110
info1@de.ebmpapst.com
www.ebmpapst.com
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
11. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
danger to persons.
These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
11.1 Hazard levels for warnings
These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
actions are not taken.
NOTE
A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
lead to property damage.
1.2 Staff qualifications
11.2 Staff qualifications
The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
authorized technical staff.
Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
1.3 Basic safety rules
11.3 Basic safety rules
The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
following installation in the final product.
The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be
observed when working on the device.
Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area
increases the risk of accidents.
Note the following when working on the device:
;Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
1.4 Voltage
11.4 Voltage
;Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
;Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.
21.5 Safety and protective features
21.6 Electromagnetic radiation
21.7 Mechanical movement
21.8 Emissions
21.9 Hot surface
21.10 Transport
21.11 Storage
32. INTENDED USE
43. TECHNICAL DATA
43.1 Product drawing
53.2 Nominal data
53.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011
53.4 Technical description
63.5 Mounting data
63.6 Transport and storage conditions
63.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
64. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
64.1 Mechanical connection
64.2 Electrical connection
74.3 Connection in terminal box
84.4 Factory settings
94.5 Connection diagram
104.6 Checking connections
104.7 Switching on the device
104.8 Switching off the device
105. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
116. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
116.1 Vibration testing
116.2 Cleaning
116.3 Safety inspection
126.4 Disposal
Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 1 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
209
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation.
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
1.5 Safety and protective features
DANGER
Protective device missing and protective device not
functioning
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and
guard grille.
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example.
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured
adequately.
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
ineffective protective device.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
with open- and closed-loop control devices.
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate
shielding measures have to be taken by the user.
NOTE
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment.
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant.
1.7 Mechanical movement
DANGER
Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
the impeller.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill.
WARNING
Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
can result.
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
while working on rotating parts.
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
1.8 Emissions
WARNING
Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
→ Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
equipment such as hearing protection.
→ Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
1.9 Hot surface
CAUTION
High temperature on electronics housing
Risk of burns
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
1.10 Transport
WARNING
Transporting the fan
Injuries from tipping or slipping
→ The fan is always to be transported with care and in its
original packaging. #If set down too hard or at an angle for
example, the impact can lead to bearing damage or
deformation of the frame or impeller. #It must be ensured that
the fans cannot tip over during transportation and handling.
→ Secure the fan(s) with appropriate equipment such as a
lashing strip so that nothing can slip or tip, especially when
stacking multiple fans. #Also make allowance for possible
wind forces.
1.11 Storage
;Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
packaging in a clean environment.
;Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
;We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
service life.
Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 2 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
210
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
;Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
described prior to commissioning.
;Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
;Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.
2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
●The device is only to be used in IT networks with a permissible
maximum voltage of 277 V between the phase conductors.
●Use of the device in stationary systems only.
●Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
●Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
●Operating the device with all protective devices.
●Following the operating instructions.
Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
●Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
●Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
●Opening the terminal box during operation.
●Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
●Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
●Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
●Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
●Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
●Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
●Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
●In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.
Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 3 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
211
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3. TECHNICAL DATA
3.1 Product drawing
All dimensions in mm.
1Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L
1.3 N
1.4 NC
1.5 COM
1.6 GND
1.7 0-10 V
1.8 +10 V
2Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 4 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
212
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3.2 Nominal data
Motor M3G084-DF
Phase 1~
Nominal voltage / VAC 230
Nominal voltage
range / VAC
200 .. 277
Frequency / Hz 50/60
Method of obtaining
data
ml
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2550
Power consumption / W 460
Current draw / A 2.0
Min. ambient
temperature / °C
-25
Max. ambient
temperature / °C
60
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment
Subject to change
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/
2011
Actual Req. 2015
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 56.2 46.8
02 Measurement category A
03 Efficiency category Static
04 Efficiency grade N 70.4 61
05 Variable speed drive Yes
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label.
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
08 Type K3G280-RR03-H4
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.44
09 Air flow qv/ m³/h 1605
09 Pressure increase total psf /
Pa
512
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2560
11 Specific ratio*1.01
12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and
maintenance is provided in the operating
instructions.
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
measurement category are detailed in the
CE declaration.
*Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller
combination in a standardized measurement setup.
3.4 Technical description
Weight 17.5 kg
Fan size 280 mm
Rotor surface Painted black
Electronics housing
material
Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Impeller material PP plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
plastic (RAL 9005)
Number of blades 6
Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
Degree of protection IP55
Insulation class "F"
Moisture (F) /
Environmental (H)
protection class
H1
Installation position Any
Condensation
drainage holes
None
Mode S1
Motor bearing Ball bearing
Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
- Operation and alarm display
- Alarm relay
- Integrated PID controller
- Power limiter
- Motor current limitation
- PFC, active
- RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
- Soft start
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
- Control interface with SELV potential
safely disconnected from the mains
- Thermal overload protection for
electronics/motor
- Line undervoltage / phase failure
detection
Touch current
according to IEC
60990 (measuring
circuit Fig. 4, TN
system)
<= 3.5 mA
Electrical hookup Via terminal box
Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
internally connected
Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
customer to the housing's connection point)
Conformity with
standards
EN 61800-5-1; CE
Approval C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1;
EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730
Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 5 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
213
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for
support.
;Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection.
Information on surface quality
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty.
3.5 Mounting data
Strength class of
screws
8.8
;Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self-
locking screws).
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions
Max. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
+80 °C
Min. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
-40 °C
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
EMC immunity to
interference
According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
environment)
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference
emission
According to EN 61000-6-3 (household
environment)
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
4.1 Mechanical connection
CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
from packaging
→ Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
→ Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
CAUTION
Heavy load when unpacking device
Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
→ Two people should work together to remove the device from
its packaging.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
attachment of the fan to the substructure.
;The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
;Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
be installed.
;Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
CAUTION
Possible damage to the device
If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
●The fan must not be strained on fastening.
4.2 Electrical connection
DANGER
Voltage on the device
Electric shock
→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.
Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 6 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
214
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
DANGER
Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
and PE connections.
CAUTION
Voltage
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch.
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being
switched back on.
NOTE
Water ingress into wires or cables
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the
device.
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry
environment.
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
4.2.1 Requirements
;Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data.
;Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches
the device voltage.
;Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the
nameplate.
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor.
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum
cable cross-section is at least
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
;Note the following when routing the cables:
For permanently installed lines, the bending radius must be at least
four times the outside diameter of the cable.
For movable lines, the bending radius must be at least 15 times the
outside diameter of the cable.
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
symbol and a hole.
4.2.2 Reactive currents
Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
on.
●The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
●At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
(operational readiness) is typically < 4 W.
4.2.3 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
(type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
while operating the device. When the device power supply is
switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
4.2.4 Locked-rotor protection
Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
4.3 Connection in terminal box
4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection
Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
NOTE
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
used.
→ This must be checked by the user.
4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
;Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
;Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
box.
;First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
;Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
;Seal the terminal box.
Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 7 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
215
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.3.3 Cable routing
Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.
4.4 Factory settings
Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 10
Save set value to
EEPROM
No
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action
parameter set 1
Positive (heating)
Direction of action
parameter set 2
Positive (heating)
Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 8 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
216
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.5 Connection diagram
Drawing preliminary!
No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment
1 1, 2 PE green/
yellow
Protective earth
1 3 N blue Power supply, neutral conductor, 50/60 Hz
1 5 L black Power supply, phase, 50/60 Hz
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact; break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10
mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact; common connection, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min.
10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value); 0-10 V; Ri = 100 kΩ; adjustable curve
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB
2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA
2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%; max. 10 mA; short-circuit-proof; power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot)
Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 9 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
217
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.6 Checking connections
;Ensure isolation from supply (all phases).
;Make sure a restart is impossible
;Check the cables for proper fit.
;Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
;Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover
closes without resistance.
;Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
the threads.
;Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.
4.7 Switching on the device
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or
similar connectors by the customer.
WARNING
Hot motor housing
Risk of fire
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
located close to the fan.
;Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
;Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any
foreign matter found.
;Apply the nominal supply voltage.
;Start the device by changing the input signal.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be
determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
failure.
→ The maximum permissible vibration severity must not
exceed 3.5 mm/s and should be checked at intervals of 6
months. #It is to be measured at the motor mount at the
motor support plate in all three 3 dimensions, see Chapter 6.
Maintenance, malfunctions, possible causes and remedies.
4.8 Switching off the device
Switching off the device during operation:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
Switching off the device for maintenance:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
;Disconnect the device from the power supply.
;When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
Fault Safety feature description/
function
Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
Blocked rotor ;After the blockage is
removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
Line undervoltage (line voltage
outside of permitted nominal
voltage range)
;If the line voltage returns to
permitted values, the motor
restarts automatically.
Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 10 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
218
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
papst for repair or replacement.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
Impeller not
running smoothly
Imbalance in rotating
parts
Clean the device;
replace it if imbalance
persists after cleaning.
Make sure no
weight clips are
removed during
cleaning.
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate
from supply and
remove mechanical
blockage.
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage,
restore power
supply, apply control
signal.
Faulty connection Isolate from supply,
correct connection;
see connection
diagram.
Thermal overload
protector activated
Allow motor to cool
off, locate and rectify
cause of error,
release restart lockout
if necessary
Motor/electronics
overtemperature
Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let
the device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Ambient temperature
too high
Reduce the ambient
temperature.
Reset by reducing
control input to 0.
Impermissible point of
operation
Correct the operating
point. Let the device
cool down.
In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
6.1 Vibration testing
Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of
the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation
situation.
6.2 Cleaning
NOTE
Damage to the device during cleaning
Malfunction possible
→ Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
→ Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
6.3 Safety inspection
NOTE
High-voltage test
The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
→ Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
the standard.
What to check How to check How often What action?
Contact
protection
cover for
intactness or
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Repair or
replacement of
device
Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 11 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
219
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-H4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
Device for
damage to
blades and
housing
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replacement of
device
Fastening the
cables
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Fastening the
protective earth
terminal
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Insulation of
cables for
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replace cables
Impeller for
wear/deposits/
corrosion and
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Clean impeller
or replace device
Tightness of
cable gland
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Retighten,
replace if
damaged
Abnormal
bearing noise
acoustic At least every
6 months
Replace device
Vibration test Vibration tester,
start-up or
deceleration
measurement
Recommended
every 6 months
Clean impeller
or replace device
6.4 Disposal
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
top priority corporate goals.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.
6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.
6.4.3 Component disposal
The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
●Steel and iron
●Aluminum
●Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
●Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
●Insulating materials
●Cables and wires
●Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
;Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
●Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
●Power cables
●Cables for internal wiring
●Electrolytic capacitors
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.
→ Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
Item no. 55768-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 12 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
220
D.5 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing,
SH180
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 221
Additional documents
D.5 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
222 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110
info1@de.ebmpapst.com
www.ebmpapst.com
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
11. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
danger to persons.
These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
11.1 Hazard levels for warnings
These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
actions are not taken.
NOTE
A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
lead to property damage.
1.2 Staff qualifications
11.2 Staff qualifications
The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
authorized technical staff.
Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
1.3 Basic safety rules
11.3 Basic safety rules
The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
following installation in the final product.
Note the following when working on the device:
;Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
1.4 Voltage
11.4 Voltage
;Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
;Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
21.5 Safety and protective features
21.6 Electromagnetic radiation
21.7 Mechanical movement
21.8 Emissions
21.9 Hot surface
21.10 Transport
21.11 Storage
32. INTENDED USE
43. TECHNICAL DATA
43.1 Product drawing
53.2 Nominal data
53.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011
53.4 Technical description
63.5 Mounting data
63.6 Transport and storage conditions
63.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
64. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
64.1 Mechanical connection
64.2 Electrical connection
74.3 Connection in terminal box
84.4 Factory settings
94.5 Connection diagram
104.6 Checking connections
104.7 Switching on the device
104.8 Switching off the device
105. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
106. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
116.1 Vibration testing
116.2 Cleaning
116.3 Safety inspection
116.4 Disposal
Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 1 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
223
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation.
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
1.5 Safety and protective features
DANGER
Protective device missing and protective device not
functioning
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and
guard grille.
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example.
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured
adequately.
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
ineffective protective device.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
with open- and closed-loop control devices.
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate
shielding measures have to be taken by the user.
NOTE
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment.
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant.
1.7 Mechanical movement
DANGER
Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
the impeller.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill.
WARNING
Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
can result.
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
while working on rotating parts.
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
1.8 Emissions
WARNING
Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
→ Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
equipment such as hearing protection.
→ Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
1.9 Hot surface
CAUTION
High temperature on electronics housing
Risk of burns
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
1.10 Transport
NOTE
Transporting the device
→ Transport the device in its original packaging only.
→ Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a
lashing strip.
1.11 Storage
;Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
packaging in a clean environment.
;Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
;We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
service life.
;Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
described prior to commissioning.
;Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
;Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.
Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 2 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
224
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
●The device is only to be used in IT networks with a permissible
maximum voltage of 277 V between the phase conductors.
●Use of the device in stationary systems only.
●Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
●Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
●Operating the device with all protective devices.
●Following the operating instructions.
Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
●Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
●Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
●Opening the terminal box during operation.
●Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
●Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
●Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
●Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
●Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
●Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
●Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
●In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.
Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 3 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
225
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3. TECHNICAL DATA
3.1 Product drawing
All dimensions in mm.
1Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L
1.3 N
1.4 NC
1.5 COM
1.6 GND
1.7 0-10 V
1.8 +10 V
2Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Accessory part: Guard grill 20180-2-4039, filter 99950-2-5170 and filter mount 25180-2-4041 not included in scope of delivery.
Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 4 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
226
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3.2 Nominal data
Motor M3G084-DF
Phase 1~
Nominal voltage / VAC 230
Nominal voltage
range / VAC
200 .. 277
Frequency / Hz 50/60
Method of obtaining
data
ml/ce
Speed (rpm) / min-1 3100
Power consumption / W 300
Current draw / A 1.3
Min. ambient
temperature / °C
-25
Max. ambient
temperature / °C
60
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment
Subject to change
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/
2011
Actual Req. 2015
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 49.7 44.8
02 Measurement category A
03 Efficiency category Static
04 Efficiency grade N 66 61
05 Variable speed drive Yes
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label.
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
08 Type K3G250-RR17-H9
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.28
09 Air flow qv/ m³/h 805
09 Pressure increase total psf /
Pa
574
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 3105
11 Specific ratio*1.01
12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and
maintenance is provided in the operating
instructions.
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
measurement category are detailed in the
CE declaration.
*Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller
combination in a standardized measurement setup.
3.4 Technical description
Weight 11.8 kg
Fan size 250 mm
Rotor surface Painted black
Electronics housing
material
Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Impeller material PA plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
plastic (RAL 9005)
Number of blades 7
Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
Degree of protection IP55
Insulation class "F"
Moisture (F) /
Environmental (H)
protection class
H1
Installation position Any
Condensation
drainage holes
None
Mode S1
Motor bearing Ball bearing
Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
- Operation and alarm display
- Alarm relay
- Integrated PID controller
- Power limiter
- Motor current limitation
- PFC, active
- RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
- Soft start
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
- Control interface with SELV potential
safely disconnected from the mains
- Thermal overload protection for
electronics/motor
- Line undervoltage / phase failure
detection
Touch current
according to IEC
60990 (measuring
circuit Fig. 4, TN
system)
<= 3.5 mA
Electrical hookup Via terminal box
Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
internally connected
Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
customer to the housing's connection point)
Conformity with
standards
EN 61800-5-1; CE
Approval UL 1004-7 + 60730; C22.2 No.77 +
CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC
Comment Operational is only permitted with the
optional guard grill available from ebm-
papst.
Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 5 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
227
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for
support.
;Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection.
Information on surface quality
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty.
3.5 Mounting data
;Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self-
locking screws).
Strength class of
screws
8.8
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions
Max. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
+80 °C
Min. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
-40 °C
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
EMC immunity to
interference
According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
environment)
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference
emission
According to EN 61000-6-3 (household
environment)
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
4.1 Mechanical connection
CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
from packaging
→ Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
→ Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
CAUTION
Heavy load when unpacking device
Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
→ Two people should work together to remove the device from
its packaging.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
attachment of the fan to the substructure.
;The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
;Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
be installed.
;Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
CAUTION
Possible damage to the device
If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
●The fan must not be strained on fastening.
4.2 Electrical connection
DANGER
Voltage on the device
Electric shock
→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.
Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 6 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
228
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
DANGER
Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
and PE connections.
CAUTION
Voltage
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch.
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being
switched back on.
NOTE
Water ingress into wires or cables
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the
device.
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry
environment.
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
4.2.1 Requirements
;Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data.
;Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches
the device voltage.
;Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the
nameplate.
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor.
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum
cable cross-section is at least
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
;Note the following when routing the cables:
For permanently installed lines, the bending radius must be at least
four times the outside diameter of the cable.
For movable lines, the bending radius must be at least 15 times the
outside diameter of the cable.
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
symbol and a hole.
4.2.2 Reactive currents
Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
on.
●The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
●At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
(operational readiness) is typically < 4 W.
4.2.3 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
(type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
while operating the device. When the device power supply is
switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
4.2.4 Locked-rotor protection
Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
4.3 Connection in terminal box
4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection
Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
NOTE
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
used.
→ This must be checked by the user.
4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
;Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
;Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
box.
;First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
;Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
;Seal the terminal box.
Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 7 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
229
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.3.3 Cable routing
Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.
4.4 Factory settings
Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 10
Save set value to
EEPROM
No
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action
parameter set 1
Positive (heating)
Direction of action
parameter set 2
Positive (heating)
Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 8 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
230
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.5 Connection diagram
Drawing preliminary!
No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment
1 1, 2 PE green/
yellow
Protective earth
1 3 N blue Power supply, neutral conductor, 50/60 Hz
1 5 L black Power supply, phase, 50/60 Hz
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact; break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10
mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact; common connection, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min.
10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value); 0-10 V; Ri = 100 kΩ; adjustable curve
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB
2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA
2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%; max. 10 mA; short-circuit-proof; power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot)
Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 9 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
231
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.6 Checking connections
;Ensure isolation from supply (all phases).
;Make sure a restart is impossible
;Check the cables for proper fit.
;Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
;Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover
closes without resistance.
;Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
the threads.
;Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.
4.7 Switching on the device
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or
similar connectors by the customer.
WARNING
Hot motor housing
Risk of fire
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
located close to the fan.
;Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
;Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any
foreign matter found.
;Apply the nominal supply voltage.
;Start the device by changing the input signal.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be
determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
failure.
4.8 Switching off the device
Switching off the device during operation:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
Switching off the device for maintenance:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
;Disconnect the device from the power supply.
;When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
Fault Safety feature description/
function
Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
Blocked rotor ;After the blockage is
removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
Line undervoltage (line voltage
outside of permitted nominal
voltage range)
;If the line voltage returns to
permitted values, the motor
restarts automatically.
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
papst for repair or replacement.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
Impeller not
running smoothly
Imbalance in rotating
parts
Clean the device;
replace it if imbalance
persists after cleaning.
Make sure no
weight clips are
removed during
cleaning.
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate
from supply and
remove mechanical
blockage.
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage,
restore power
supply, apply control
signal.
Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 10 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
232
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
Faulty connection Isolate from supply,
correct connection;
see connection
diagram.
Thermal overload
protector activated
Allow motor to cool
off, locate and rectify
cause of error,
release restart lockout
if necessary
Motor/electronics
overtemperature
Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let
the device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Ambient temperature
too high
Reduce the ambient
temperature.
Reset by reducing
control input to 0.
Impermissible point of
operation
Correct the operating
point. Let the device
cool down.
In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
6.1 Vibration testing
Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of
the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation
situation.
6.2 Cleaning
NOTE
Damage to the device during cleaning
Malfunction possible
→ Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
→ Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
6.3 Safety inspection
NOTE
High-voltage test
The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
→ Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
the standard.
What to check How to check How often What action?
Contact
protection
cover for
intactness or
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Repair or
replacement of
device
Device for
damage to
blades and
housing
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replacement of
device
Fastening the
cables
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Fastening the
protective earth
terminal
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Insulation of
cables for
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replace cables
Impeller for
wear/deposits/
corrosion and
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Clean or
replace impeller
Tightness of
cable gland
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Retighten,
replace if
damaged
Abnormal
bearing noise
acoustic At least every
6 months
Replace device
6.4 Disposal
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
top priority corporate goals.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 11 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
233
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.
6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.
6.4.3 Component disposal
The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
●Steel and iron
●Aluminum
●Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
●Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
●Insulating materials
●Cables and wires
●Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
;Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
●Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
●Power cables
●Cables for internal wiring
●Electrolytic capacitors
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.
→ Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
Item no. 55686-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 12 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
234
D.6 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing,
SH225
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 235
Additional documents
D.6 Operating instructions for the single-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
236 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110
info1@de.ebmpapst.com
www.ebmpapst.com
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
11. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
danger to persons.
These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
11.1 Hazard levels for warnings
These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
actions are not taken.
NOTE
A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
lead to property damage.
1.2 Staff qualifications
11.2 Staff qualifications
The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
authorized technical staff.
Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
1.3 Basic safety rules
11.3 Basic safety rules
The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
following installation in the final product.
The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be
observed when working on the device.
Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area
increases the risk of accidents.
Note the following when working on the device:
;Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
1.4 Voltage
11.4 Voltage
;Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
;Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.
21.5 Safety and protective features
21.6 Electromagnetic radiation
21.7 Mechanical movement
21.8 Emissions
21.9 Hot surface
21.10 Transport
21.11 Storage
32. INTENDED USE
43. TECHNICAL DATA
43.1 Product drawing
53.2 Nominal data
53.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011
53.4 Technical description
63.5 Mounting data
63.6 Transport and storage conditions
63.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
64. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
64.1 Mechanical connection
64.2 Electrical connection
74.3 Connection in terminal box
84.4 Factory settings
94.5 Connection diagram
104.6 Checking connections
104.7 Switching on the device
104.8 Switching off the device
105. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
116. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
116.1 Vibration testing
116.2 Cleaning
116.3 Safety inspection
126.4 Disposal
Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 1 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
237
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation.
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
1.5 Safety and protective features
DANGER
Protective device missing and protective device not
functioning
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and
guard grille.
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example.
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured
adequately.
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
ineffective protective device.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
with open- and closed-loop control devices.
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate
shielding measures have to be taken by the user.
NOTE
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment.
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant.
1.7 Mechanical movement
DANGER
Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
the impeller.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill.
WARNING
Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
can result.
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
while working on rotating parts.
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
1.8 Emissions
WARNING
Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
→ Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
equipment such as hearing protection.
→ Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
1.9 Hot surface
CAUTION
High temperature on electronics housing
Risk of burns
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
1.10 Transport
WARNING
Transporting the fan
Injuries from tipping or slipping
→ The fan is always to be transported with care and in its
original packaging. #If set down too hard or at an angle for
example, the impact can lead to bearing damage or
deformation of the frame or impeller. #It must be ensured that
the fans cannot tip over during transportation and handling.
→ Secure the fan(s) with appropriate equipment such as a
lashing strip so that nothing can slip or tip, especially when
stacking multiple fans. #Also make allowance for possible
wind forces.
1.11 Storage
;Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
packaging in a clean environment.
;Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
;We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
service life.
Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 2 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
238
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
;Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
described prior to commissioning.
;Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
;Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.
2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
●The device is only to be used in IT networks with a permissible
maximum voltage of 277 V between the phase conductors.
●Use of the device in stationary systems only.
●Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
●Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
●Operating the device with all protective devices.
●Following the operating instructions.
Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
●Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
●Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
●Opening the terminal box during operation.
●Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
●Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
●Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
●Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
●Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
●Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
●Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
●In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.
Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 3 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
239
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3. TECHNICAL DATA
3.1 Product drawing
All dimensions in mm.
1Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L
1.3 N
1.4 NC
1.5 COM
1.6 GND
1.7 0-10 V
1.8 +10 V
2Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Accessory part: Guard grill 20225-2-4039, filter 99951-2-5170 and filter mount 25225-2-4041 not included in scope of delivery.
Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 4 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
240
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3.2 Nominal data
Motor M3G084-DF
Phase 1~
Nominal voltage / VAC 230
Nominal voltage
range / VAC
200 .. 277
Frequency / Hz 50/60
Method of obtaining
data
ml
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2700
Power consumption / W 520
Current draw / A 2.3
Min. ambient
temperature / °C
-25
Max. ambient
temperature / °C
60
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment
Subject to change
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/
2011
Actual Req. 2015
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 58.6 47.4
02 Measurement category A
03 Efficiency category Static
04 Efficiency grade N 72.2 61
05 Variable speed drive Yes
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label.
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
08 Type K3G280-RR04-H9
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.51
09 Air flow qv/ m³/h 1815
09 Pressure increase total psf /
Pa
540
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2655
11 Specific ratio*1.01
12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and
maintenance is provided in the operating
instructions.
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
measurement category are detailed in the
CE declaration.
*Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller
combination in a standardized measurement setup.
3.4 Technical description
Weight 16.8 kg
Fan size 280 mm
Rotor surface Painted black
Electronics housing
material
Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Impeller material PP plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
plastic (RAL 9005)
Number of blades 6
Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
Degree of protection IP55
Insulation class "F"
Moisture (F) /
Environmental (H)
protection class
H1
Installation position Any
Condensation
drainage holes
None
Mode S1
Motor bearing Ball bearing
Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
- Operation and alarm display
- Alarm relay
- Integrated PID controller
- Power limiter
- Motor current limitation
- PFC, active
- RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
- Soft start
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
- Control interface with SELV potential
safely disconnected from the mains
- Thermal overload protection for
electronics/motor
- Line undervoltage / phase failure
detection
Touch current
according to IEC
60990 (measuring
circuit Fig. 4, TN
system)
<= 3.5 mA
Electrical hookup Via terminal box
Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
internally connected
Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
customer to the housing's connection point)
Conformity with
standards
EN 61800-5-1; CE
Approval UL 1004-7 + 60730; C22.2 No.77 +
CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC
Comment Operational is only permitted with the
optional guard grill available from ebm-
papst.
Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 5 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
241
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for
support.
;Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection.
Information on surface quality
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty.
3.5 Mounting data
Strength class of
screws
8.8
;Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self-
locking screws).
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions
Max. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
+80 °C
Min. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
-40 °C
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
EMC immunity to
interference
According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
environment)
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference
emission
According to EN 61000-6-3 (household
environment)
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
4.1 Mechanical connection
CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
from packaging
→ Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
→ Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
CAUTION
Heavy load when unpacking device
Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
→ Two people should work together to remove the device from
its packaging.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
attachment of the fan to the substructure.
;The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
;Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
be installed.
;Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
CAUTION
Possible damage to the device
If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
●The fan must not be strained on fastening.
4.2 Electrical connection
DANGER
Voltage on the device
Electric shock
→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.
Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 6 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
242
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
DANGER
Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
and PE connections.
CAUTION
Voltage
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch.
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being
switched back on.
NOTE
Water ingress into wires or cables
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the
device.
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry
environment.
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
4.2.1 Requirements
;Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data.
;Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches
the device voltage.
;Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the
nameplate.
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor.
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum
cable cross-section is at least
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
;Note the following when routing the cables:
For permanently installed lines, the bending radius must be at least
four times the outside diameter of the cable.
For movable lines, the bending radius must be at least 15 times the
outside diameter of the cable.
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
symbol and a hole.
4.2.2 Reactive currents
Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
on.
●The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
●At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
(operational readiness) is typically < 4 W.
4.2.3 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
(type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
while operating the device. When the device power supply is
switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
4.2.4 Locked-rotor protection
Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
4.3 Connection in terminal box
4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection
Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
NOTE
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
used.
→ This must be checked by the user.
4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
;Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
;Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
box.
;First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
;Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
;Seal the terminal box.
Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 7 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
243
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.3.3 Cable routing
Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.
4.4 Factory settings
Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 10
Save set value to
EEPROM
No
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action
parameter set 1
Positive (heating)
Direction of action
parameter set 2
Positive (heating)
Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 8 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
244
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.5 Connection diagram
Drawing preliminary!
No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment
1 1, 2 PE green/
yellow
Protective earth
1 3 N blue Power supply, neutral conductor, 50/60 Hz
1 5 L black Power supply, phase, 50/60 Hz
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact; break for failure, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min. 10
mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact; common connection, contact rating 250 VAC / 2A (AC1) / min.
10 mA, basic insulation on supply side and reinforced insulation on control interface side
2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value); 0-10 V; Ri = 100 kΩ; adjustable curve
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB
2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA
2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%; max. 10 mA; short-circuit-proof; power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot)
Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 9 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
245
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.6 Checking connections
;Ensure isolation from supply (all phases).
;Make sure a restart is impossible
;Check the cables for proper fit.
;Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
;Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover
closes without resistance.
;Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
the threads.
;Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.
4.7 Switching on the device
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or
similar connectors by the customer.
WARNING
Hot motor housing
Risk of fire
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
located close to the fan.
;Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
;Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any
foreign matter found.
;Apply the nominal supply voltage.
;Start the device by changing the input signal.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be
determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
failure.
→ The maximum permissible vibration severity must not
exceed 3.5 mm/s and should be checked at intervals of 6
months. #It is to be measured at the motor mount at the
motor support plate in all three 3 dimensions, see Chapter 6.
Maintenance, malfunctions, possible causes and remedies.
4.8 Switching off the device
Switching off the device during operation:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
Switching off the device for maintenance:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
;Disconnect the device from the power supply.
;When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
Fault Safety feature description/
function
Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
Blocked rotor ;After the blockage is
removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
Line undervoltage (line voltage
outside of permitted nominal
voltage range)
;If the line voltage returns to
permitted values, the motor
restarts automatically.
Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 10 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
246
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
papst for repair or replacement.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
Impeller not
running smoothly
Imbalance in rotating
parts
Clean the device;
replace it if imbalance
persists after cleaning.
Make sure no
weight clips are
removed during
cleaning.
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate
from supply and
remove mechanical
blockage.
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage,
restore power
supply, apply control
signal.
Faulty connection Isolate from supply,
correct connection;
see connection
diagram.
Thermal overload
protector activated
Allow motor to cool
off, locate and rectify
cause of error,
release restart lockout
if necessary
Motor/electronics
overtemperature
Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let
the device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Ambient temperature
too high
Reduce the ambient
temperature.
Reset by reducing
control input to 0.
Impermissible point of
operation
Correct the operating
point. Let the device
cool down.
In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
6.1 Vibration testing
Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of
the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation
situation.
6.2 Cleaning
NOTE
Damage to the device during cleaning
Malfunction possible
→ Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
→ Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
6.3 Safety inspection
NOTE
High-voltage test
The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
→ Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
the standard.
What to check How to check How often What action?
Contact
protection
cover for
intactness or
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Repair or
replacement of
device
Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 11 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
247
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-H9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
Device for
damage to
blades and
housing
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replacement of
device
Fastening the
cables
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Fastening the
protective earth
terminal
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Insulation of
cables for
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replace cables
Impeller for
wear/deposits/
corrosion and
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Clean impeller
or replace device
Tightness of
cable gland
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Retighten,
replace if
damaged
Abnormal
bearing noise
acoustic At least every
6 months
Replace device
Vibration test Vibration tester,
start-up or
deceleration
measurement
Recommended
every 6 months
Clean impeller
or replace device
6.4 Disposal
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
top priority corporate goals.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.
6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.
6.4.3 Component disposal
The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
●Steel and iron
●Aluminum
●Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
●Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
●Insulating materials
●Cables and wires
●Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
;Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
●Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
●Power cables
●Cables for internal wiring
●Electrolytic capacitors
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.
→ Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
Item no. 55769-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94781 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 12 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
248
D.7 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction,
SK180
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 249
Additional documents
D.7 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK180
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
250 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110
info1@de.ebmpapst.com
www.ebmpapst.com
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
11. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
danger to persons.
These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
11.1 Hazard levels for warnings
These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
actions are not taken.
NOTE
A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
lead to property damage.
1.2 Staff qualifications
11.2 Staff qualifications
The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
authorized technical staff.
Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
1.3 Basic safety rules
11.3 Basic safety rules
The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
following installation in the final product.
Note the following when working on the device:
;Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
1.4 Voltage
11.4 Voltage
;Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
;Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
21.5 Safety and protective features
21.6 Electromagnetic radiation
21.7 Mechanical movement
21.8 Emissions
21.9 Hot surface
21.10 Transport
21.11 Storage
32. INTENDED USE
43. TECHNICAL DATA
43.1 Product drawing
53.2 Nominal data
53.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011
53.4 Technical description
63.5 Mounting data
63.6 Transport and storage conditions
63.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
64. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
64.1 Mechanical connection
64.2 Electrical connection
74.3 Connection in terminal box
84.4 Factory settings
94.5 Connection diagram
104.6 Checking connections
104.7 Switching on the device
104.8 Switching off the device
105. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
106. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
116.1 Vibration testing
116.2 Cleaning
116.3 Safety inspection
126.4 Disposal
Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 1 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
251
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation.
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
1.5 Safety and protective features
DANGER
Protective device missing and protective device not
functioning
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and
guard grille.
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example.
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured
adequately.
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
ineffective protective device.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
with open- and closed-loop control devices.
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate
shielding measures have to be taken by the user.
NOTE
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment.
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant.
1.7 Mechanical movement
DANGER
Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
the impeller.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill.
WARNING
Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
can result.
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
while working on rotating parts.
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
1.8 Emissions
WARNING
Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
→ Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
equipment such as hearing protection.
→ Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
1.9 Hot surface
CAUTION
High temperature on electronics housing
Risk of burns
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
1.10 Transport
NOTE
Transporting the device
→ Transport the device in its original packaging only.
→ Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a
lashing strip.
1.11 Storage
;Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
packaging in a clean environment.
;Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
;We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
service life.
;Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
described prior to commissioning.
;Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
;Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.
Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 2 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
252
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
●Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/
TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems.
●The device is to be used in networks with network quality
characteristics as per EN 50160.
●Use of the device in stationary systems only.
●Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
●Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
●Operating the device with all protective devices.
●Following the operating instructions.
Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
●Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
●Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
●Opening the terminal box during operation.
●Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
●Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
●Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
●Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
●Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
●Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
●Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
●In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.
Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 3 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
253
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3. TECHNICAL DATA
3.1 Product drawing
All dimensions in mm.
1Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L1
1.3 L2
1.4 L3
1.5 NC
1.6 COM
1.7 GND
1.8 0-10 V
1.9 +10 V
2Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 4 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
254
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3.2 Nominal data
Motor M3G084-DF
Phase 3~
Nominal voltage / VAC 400
Nominal voltage
range / VAC
380 .. 480
Frequency / Hz 50/60
Method of obtaining
data
ml
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2900
Power consumption / W 240
Current draw / A 0.44
Min. ambient
temperature / °C
-25
Max. ambient
temperature / °C
60
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment
Subject to change
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/
2011
Actual Req. 2015
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 46.9 43.9
02 Measurement category A
03 Efficiency category Static
04 Efficiency grade N 64.1 61
05 Variable speed drive Yes
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label.
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
08 Type K3G250-RR03-M4
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.23
09 Air flow qv/ m³/h 700
09 Pressure increase total psf /
Pa
500
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2920
11 Specific ratio*1.01
12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and
maintenance is provided in the operating
instructions.
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
measurement category are detailed in the
CE declaration.
*Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller
combination in a standardized measurement setup.
3.4 Technical description
Weight 11.8 kg
Fan size 250 mm
Rotor surface Painted black
Electronics housing
material
Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Impeller material PA plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
plastic (RAL 9005)
Number of blades 7
Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
Degree of protection IP55
Insulation class "F"
Moisture (F) /
Environmental (H)
protection class
H1
Installation position Any
Condensation
drainage holes
None
Mode S1
Motor bearing Ball bearing
Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
- Operation and alarm display
- External 24 V input (parameter setting)
- Alarm relay
- Integrated PID controller
- Motor current limitation
- PFC, passive
- RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
- Soft start
- EEPROM write cycles: 100,000
maximum
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
- Control interface with SELV potential
safely disconnected from the mains
- Thermal overload protection for
electronics/motor
- Line undervoltage / phase failure
detection
Touch current
according to IEC
60990 (measuring
circuit Fig. 4, TN
system)
<= 3.5 mA
Electrical hookup Via terminal box
Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
internally connected
Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
customer to the housing's connection point)
Conformity with
standards
EN 61800-5-1; CE
Approval C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1;
EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730
Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 5 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
255
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for
support.
;Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection.
Information on surface quality
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty.
3.5 Mounting data
;Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self-
locking screws).
Strength class of
screws
8.8
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions
Max. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
+80 °C
Min. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
-40 °C
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
EMC immunity to
interference
According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
environment)
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference
emission
According to EN 61000-6-3 (household
environment)
If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side
so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 16-
75 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12
provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point
of the customer system to the public power system is greater
than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/
owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation
with the network operator, that this device is only connected to
a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal
to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
4.1 Mechanical connection
CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
from packaging
→ Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
→ Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
CAUTION
Heavy load when unpacking device
Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
→ Two people should work together to remove the device from
its packaging.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
attachment of the fan to the substructure.
;The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
;Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
be installed.
;Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
CAUTION
Possible damage to the device
If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
●The fan must not be strained on fastening.
4.2 Electrical connection
DANGER
Voltage on the device
Electric shock
→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.
Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 6 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
256
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
DANGER
Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
and PE connections.
CAUTION
Voltage
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch.
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being
switched back on.
NOTE
Device malfunctions possible
Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line.
→ Maintain the greatest possible clearance.
Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable
routing)
NOTE
Water ingress into wires or cables
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the
device.
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry
environment.
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
4.2.1 Requirements
;Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data.
;Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches
the device voltage.
;Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the
nameplate.
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor.
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum
cable cross-section is at least
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
symbol and a hole.
4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses
Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line
protection only, no equipment protection).
Nominal
voltage
Fuse Automatic
circuit
breaker
Cable
cross-
section
Cable
cross-
section
VDE UL VDE mm² *AWG
3/PE AC
380-480
VAC
16 A 15 A C16A 1.5 16
* AWG = American Wire Gauge
4.2.3 Reactive currents
Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
on.
●The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
●At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
(operational readiness) is typically < 5 W.
4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
(type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
while operating the device. When the device power supply is
switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
4.2.5 Leakage current
For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the
leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value.
4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection
Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
4.3 Connection in terminal box
4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection
Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
NOTE
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
used.
→ This must be checked by the user.
Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 7 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
257
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
;Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
;Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
box.
;First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
;Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
;Seal the terminal box.
4.3.3 Cable routing
Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.
4.4 Factory settings
Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 5
Save set value to
EEPROM
Yes
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action
parameter set 1
Positive (heating)
Direction of action
parameter set 2
Positive (heating)
Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 8 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
258
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.5 Connection diagram
Drawing preliminary!
No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment
1 1, 2 PE green/
yellow
Protective earth
1 3 L1 black Power supply
1 4 L2 black Power supply
1 5 L3 black Power supply
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
insulation on control interface side
2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value), 0-10 V, Ri = 100 kΩ, adjustable curve, SELV
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV
2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV
2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot), SELV
fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply
Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 9 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
259
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.6 Checking connections
;Ensure isolation from supply (all phases).
;Make sure a restart is impossible
;Check the cables for proper fit.
;Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
;Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover
closes without resistance.
;Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
the threads.
;Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.
4.7 Switching on the device
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or
similar connectors by the customer.
WARNING
Hot motor housing
Risk of fire
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
located close to the fan.
;Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
;Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any
foreign matter found.
;Apply the nominal supply voltage.
;Start the device by changing the input signal.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be
determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
failure.
4.8 Switching off the device
Switching off the device during operation:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
Switching off the device for maintenance:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
;Disconnect the device from the power supply.
;When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
Fault Safety feature description/
function
Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
Blocked rotor ;After the blockage is
removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
Line undervoltage (line voltage
outside of permitted nominal
voltage range)
;If the line voltage returns to
permitted values, the motor
restarts automatically.
Phase failure A phase of the supply voltage
fails for at least 5 s.
;When all phases are
correctly supplied again, the
motor automatically restarts after
10-40 s.
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
papst for repair or replacement.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
Impeller not
running smoothly
Imbalance in rotating
parts
Clean the device;
replace it if imbalance
persists after cleaning.
Make sure no
weight clips are
removed during
cleaning.
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate
from supply and
remove mechanical
blockage.
Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 10 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
260
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage,
restore power supply.
Attention! The error
message resets
automatically.
Device restarts
automatically without
warning.
Faulty connection Isolate from supply,
correct connection;
see connection
diagram.
Broken motor winding Replace device
Thermal overload
protector activated
Allow motor to cool
off, locate and rectify
cause of error,
release restart lockout
if necessary
Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let
the device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
Ambient temperature
too high
Reduce the ambient
temperature. Let the
device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
Impermissible point of
operation (e.g. back
pressure too high)
Correct the operating
point. Let the device
cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
6.1 Vibration testing
Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of
the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation
situation.
6.2 Cleaning
NOTE
Damage to the device during cleaning
Malfunction possible
→ Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
→ Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
6.3 Safety inspection
NOTE
High-voltage test
The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
→ Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
the standard.
What to check How to check How often What action?
Contact
protection
cover for
intactness or
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Repair or
replacement of
device
Device for
damage to
blades and
housing
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replacement of
device
Fastening the
cables
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 11 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
261
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
Fastening the
protective earth
terminal
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Insulation of
cables for
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replace cables
Impeller for
wear/deposits/
corrosion and
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Clean or
replace impeller
Tightness of
cable gland
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Retighten,
replace if
damaged
Abnormal
bearing noise
acoustic At least every
6 months
Replace device
6.4 Disposal
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
top priority corporate goals.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.
6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.
6.4.3 Component disposal
The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
●Steel and iron
●Aluminum
●Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
●Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
●Insulating materials
●Cables and wires
●Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
;Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
●Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
●Power cables
●Cables for internal wiring
●Electrolytic capacitors
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.
→ Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
Item no. 55691-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 12 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
262
D.8 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction,
SK225
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 263
Additional documents
D.8 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SK225
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
264 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110
info1@de.ebmpapst.com
www.ebmpapst.com
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
11. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
danger to persons.
These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
11.1 Hazard levels for warnings
These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
actions are not taken.
NOTE
A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
lead to property damage.
1.2 Staff qualifications
11.2 Staff qualifications
The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
authorized technical staff.
Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
1.3 Basic safety rules
11.3 Basic safety rules
The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
following installation in the final product.
The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be
observed when working on the device.
Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area
increases the risk of accidents.
Note the following when working on the device:
;Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
1.4 Voltage
11.4 Voltage
;Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
;Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.
21.5 Safety and protective features
21.6 Electromagnetic radiation
21.7 Mechanical movement
21.8 Emissions
21.9 Hot surface
21.10 Transport
21.11 Storage
32. INTENDED USE
43. TECHNICAL DATA
43.1 Product drawing
53.2 Nominal data
53.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011
53.4 Technical description
63.5 Mounting data
63.6 Transport and storage conditions
63.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
64. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
64.1 Mechanical connection
64.2 Electrical connection
74.3 Connection in terminal box
84.4 Factory settings
94.5 Connection diagram
104.6 Checking connections
104.7 Switching on the device
104.8 Switching off the device
105. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
116. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
116.1 Vibration testing
126.2 Cleaning
126.3 Safety inspection
126.4 Disposal
Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 1 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
265
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation.
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
1.5 Safety and protective features
DANGER
Protective device missing and protective device not
functioning
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and
guard grille.
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example.
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured
adequately.
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
ineffective protective device.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
with open- and closed-loop control devices.
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate
shielding measures have to be taken by the user.
NOTE
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment.
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant.
1.7 Mechanical movement
DANGER
Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
the impeller.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill.
WARNING
Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
can result.
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
while working on rotating parts.
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
1.8 Emissions
WARNING
Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
→ Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
equipment such as hearing protection.
→ Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
1.9 Hot surface
CAUTION
High temperature on electronics housing
Risk of burns
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
1.10 Transport
WARNING
Transporting the fan
Injuries from tipping or slipping
→ The fan is always to be transported with care and in its
original packaging. #If set down too hard or at an angle for
example, the impact can lead to bearing damage or
deformation of the frame or impeller. #It must be ensured that
the fans cannot tip over during transportation and handling.
→ Secure the fan(s) with appropriate equipment such as a
lashing strip so that nothing can slip or tip, especially when
stacking multiple fans. #Also make allowance for possible
wind forces.
1.11 Storage
;Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
packaging in a clean environment.
;Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
;We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
service life.
Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 2 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
266
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
;Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
described prior to commissioning.
;Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
;Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.
2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
●Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/
TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems.
●The device is to be used in networks with network quality
characteristics as per EN 50160.
●Use of the device in stationary systems only.
●Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
●Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
●Operating the device with all protective devices.
●Following the operating instructions.
Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
●Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
●Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
●Opening the terminal box during operation.
●Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
●Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
●Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
●Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
●Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
●Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
●Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
●In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.
Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 3 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
267
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3. TECHNICAL DATA
3.1 Product drawing
All dimensions in mm.
1Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L1
1.3 L2
1.4 L3
1.5 NC
1.6 COM
1.7 GND
1.8 0-10 V
1.9 +10 V
2Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 4 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
268
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3.2 Nominal data
Motor M3G084-DF
Phase 3~
Nominal voltage / VAC 400
Nominal voltage
range / VAC
380 .. 480
Frequency / Hz 50/60
Method of obtaining
data
ml
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2550
Power consumption / W 450
Current draw / A 0.75
Min. ambient
temperature / °C
-25
Max. ambient
temperature / °C
60
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment
Subject to change
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/
2011
Actual Req. 2015
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 56.9 46.5
02 Measurement category A
03 Efficiency category Static
04 Efficiency grade N 71.4 61
05 Variable speed drive Yes
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label.
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
08 Type K3G280-RR03-M4
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.42
09 Air flow qv/ m³/h 1400
09 Pressure increase total psf /
Pa
557
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2555
11 Specific ratio*1.01
12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and
maintenance is provided in the operating
instructions.
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
measurement category are detailed in the
CE declaration.
*Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller
combination in a standardized measurement setup.
3.4 Technical description
Weight 18.0 kg
Fan size 280 mm
Rotor surface Painted black
Electronics housing
material
Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Impeller material PP plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
plastic (RAL 9005)
Number of blades 6
Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
Degree of protection IP55
Insulation class "F"
Moisture (F) /
Environmental (H)
protection class
H1
Installation position Any
Condensation
drainage holes
None
Mode S1
Motor bearing Ball bearing
Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
- Operation and alarm display
- External 24 V input (parameter setting)
- Alarm relay
- Integrated PID controller
- Motor current limitation
- PFC, passive
- RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
- Soft start
- EEPROM write cycles: 100,000
maximum
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
- Control interface with SELV potential
safely disconnected from the mains
- Thermal overload protection for
electronics/motor
- Line undervoltage / phase failure
detection
Touch current
according to IEC
60990 (measuring
circuit Fig. 4, TN
system)
<= 3.5 mA
Electrical hookup Via terminal box
Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
internally connected
Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
customer to the housing's connection point)
Conformity with
standards
EN 61800-5-1; CE
Approval C22.2 No.77 + CAN/CSA-E60730-1;
EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730
Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 5 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
269
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for
support.
;Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection.
Information on surface quality
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty.
3.5 Mounting data
Strength class of
screws
8.8
;Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self-
locking screws).
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions
Max. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
+80 °C
Min. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
-40 °C
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
EMC immunity to
interference
According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
environment)
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference
emission
According to EN 61000-6-3 (household
environment)
If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side
so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 16-
75 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12
provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point
of the customer system to the public power system is greater
than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/
owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation
with the network operator, that this device is only connected to
a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal
to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
4.1 Mechanical connection
CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
from packaging
→ Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
→ Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
CAUTION
Heavy load when unpacking device
Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
→ Two people should work together to remove the device from
its packaging.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
attachment of the fan to the substructure.
;The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
;Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
be installed.
;Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
CAUTION
Possible damage to the device
If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
●The fan must not be strained on fastening.
4.2 Electrical connection
DANGER
Voltage on the device
Electric shock
→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.
Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 6 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
270
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
DANGER
Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
and PE connections.
CAUTION
Voltage
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch.
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being
switched back on.
NOTE
Device malfunctions possible
Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line.
→ Maintain the greatest possible clearance.
Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable
routing)
NOTE
Water ingress into wires or cables
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the
device.
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry
environment.
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
4.2.1 Requirements
;Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data.
;Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches
the device voltage.
;Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the
nameplate.
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor.
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum
cable cross-section is at least
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
symbol and a hole.
4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses
Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line
protection only, no equipment protection).
Nominal
voltage
Fuse Automatic
circuit
breaker
Cable
cross-
section
Cable
cross-
section
VDE UL VDE mm² *AWG
3/PE AC
380-480
VAC
16 A 15 A C16A 1.5 16
* AWG = American Wire Gauge
4.2.3 Reactive currents
Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
on.
●The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
●At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
(operational readiness) is typically < 5 W.
4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
(type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
while operating the device. When the device power supply is
switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
4.2.5 Leakage current
For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the
leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value.
4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection
Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
4.3 Connection in terminal box
4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection
Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
NOTE
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
used.
→ This must be checked by the user.
Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 7 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
271
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
;Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
;Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
box.
;First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
;Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
;Seal the terminal box.
4.3.3 Cable routing
Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.
4.4 Factory settings
Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 5
Save set value to
EEPROM
Yes
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action
parameter set 1
Positive (heating)
Direction of action
parameter set 2
Positive (heating)
Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 8 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
272
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.5 Connection diagram
Drawing preliminary!
No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment
1 1, 2 PE green/
yellow
Protective earth
1 3 L1 black Power supply
1 4 L2 black Power supply
1 5 L3 black Power supply
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
insulation on control interface side
2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value), 0-10 V, Ri = 100 kΩ, adjustable curve, SELV
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV
2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV
2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot), SELV
fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply
Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 9 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
273
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.6 Checking connections
;Ensure isolation from supply (all phases).
;Make sure a restart is impossible
;Check the cables for proper fit.
;Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
;Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover
closes without resistance.
;Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
the threads.
;Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.
4.7 Switching on the device
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or
similar connectors by the customer.
WARNING
Hot motor housing
Risk of fire
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
located close to the fan.
;Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
;Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any
foreign matter found.
;Apply the nominal supply voltage.
;Start the device by changing the input signal.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be
determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
failure.
→ The maximum permissible vibration severity must not
exceed 3.5 mm/s and should be checked at intervals of 6
months. #It is to be measured at the motor mount at the
motor support plate in all three 3 dimensions, see Chapter 6.
Maintenance, malfunctions, possible causes and remedies.
4.8 Switching off the device
Switching off the device during operation:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
Switching off the device for maintenance:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
;Disconnect the device from the power supply.
;When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
Fault Safety feature description/
function
Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
Blocked rotor ;After the blockage is
removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
Line undervoltage (line voltage
outside of permitted nominal
voltage range)
;If the line voltage returns to
permitted values, the motor
restarts automatically.
Phase failure A phase of the supply voltage
fails for at least 5 s.
;When all phases are
correctly supplied again, the
motor automatically restarts after
10-40 s.
Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 10 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
274
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
papst for repair or replacement.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
Impeller not
running smoothly
Imbalance in rotating
parts
Clean the device;
replace it if imbalance
persists after cleaning.
Make sure no
weight clips are
removed during
cleaning.
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate
from supply and
remove mechanical
blockage.
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage,
restore power supply.
Attention! The error
message resets
automatically.
Device restarts
automatically without
warning.
Faulty connection Isolate from supply,
correct connection;
see connection
diagram.
Broken motor winding Replace device
Thermal overload
protector activated
Allow motor to cool
off, locate and rectify
cause of error,
release restart lockout
if necessary
Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let
the device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
Ambient temperature
too high
Reduce the ambient
temperature. Let the
device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
Impermissible point of
operation (e.g. back
pressure too high)
Correct the operating
point. Let the device
cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
6.1 Vibration testing
Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 11 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
275
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of
the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation
situation.
6.2 Cleaning
NOTE
Damage to the device during cleaning
Malfunction possible
→ Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
→ Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
6.3 Safety inspection
NOTE
High-voltage test
The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
→ Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
the standard.
What to check How to check How often What action?
Contact
protection
cover for
intactness or
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Repair or
replacement of
device
Device for
damage to
blades and
housing
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replacement of
device
Fastening the
cables
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Fastening the
protective earth
terminal
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Insulation of
cables for
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replace cables
Impeller for
wear/deposits/
corrosion and
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Clean impeller
or replace device
Tightness of
cable gland
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Retighten,
replace if
damaged
Abnormal
bearing noise
acoustic At least every
6 months
Replace device
Vibration test Vibration tester,
start-up or
deceleration
measurement
Recommended
every 6 months
Clean impeller
or replace device
6.4 Disposal
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
top priority corporate goals.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.
6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.
6.4.3 Component disposal
The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
●Steel and iron
●Aluminum
●Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
●Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
●Insulating materials
●Cables and wires
●Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 12 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
276
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR03-M4
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
;Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
●Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
●Power cables
●Cables for internal wiring
●Electrolytic capacitors
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.
→ Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
Item no. 55771-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94605 · Approved 2017-09-29 · Page 13 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
277
278
D.9 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing,
SH180
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 279
Additional documents
D.9 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH180
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
280 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110
info1@de.ebmpapst.com
www.ebmpapst.com
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
11. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
danger to persons.
These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
11.1 Hazard levels for warnings
These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
actions are not taken.
NOTE
A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
lead to property damage.
1.2 Staff qualifications
11.2 Staff qualifications
The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
authorized technical staff.
Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
1.3 Basic safety rules
11.3 Basic safety rules
The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
following installation in the final product.
Note the following when working on the device:
;Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
1.4 Voltage
11.4 Voltage
;Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
;Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
21.5 Safety and protective features
21.6 Electromagnetic radiation
21.7 Mechanical movement
21.8 Emissions
21.9 Hot surface
21.10 Transport
21.11 Storage
32. INTENDED USE
43. TECHNICAL DATA
43.1 Product drawing
53.2 Nominal data
53.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011
53.4 Technical description
63.5 Mounting data
63.6 Transport and storage conditions
63.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
64. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
64.1 Mechanical connection
64.2 Electrical connection
74.3 Connection in terminal box
84.4 Factory settings
94.5 Connection diagram
104.6 Checking connections
104.7 Switching on the device
104.8 Switching off the device
105. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
106. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
116.1 Vibration testing
116.2 Cleaning
116.3 Safety inspection
126.4 Disposal
Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 1 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
281
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation.
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
1.5 Safety and protective features
DANGER
Protective device missing and protective device not
functioning
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and
guard grille.
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example.
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured
adequately.
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
ineffective protective device.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
with open- and closed-loop control devices.
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate
shielding measures have to be taken by the user.
NOTE
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment.
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant.
1.7 Mechanical movement
DANGER
Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
the impeller.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill.
WARNING
Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
can result.
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
while working on rotating parts.
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
1.8 Emissions
WARNING
Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
→ Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
equipment such as hearing protection.
→ Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
1.9 Hot surface
CAUTION
High temperature on electronics housing
Risk of burns
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
1.10 Transport
NOTE
Transporting the device
→ Transport the device in its original packaging only.
→ Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a
lashing strip.
1.11 Storage
;Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
packaging in a clean environment.
;Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
;We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
service life.
;Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
described prior to commissioning.
;Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
;Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.
Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 2 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
282
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
●Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/
TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems.
●The device is to be used in networks with network quality
characteristics as per EN 50160.
●Use of the device in stationary systems only.
●Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
●Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
●Operating the device with all protective devices.
●Following the operating instructions.
Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
●Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
●Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
●Opening the terminal box during operation.
●Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
●Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
●Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
●Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
●Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
●Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
●Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
●In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.
Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 3 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
283
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3. TECHNICAL DATA
3.1 Product drawing
All dimensions in mm.
1Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L1
1.3 L2
1.4 L3
1.5 NC
1.6 COM
1.7 GND
1.8 0-10 V
1.9 +10 V
2Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Accessory part: Guard grill 20180-2-4039, filter 99950-2-5170 and filter mount 25180-2-4041 not included in scope of delivery.
Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 4 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
284
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3.2 Nominal data
Motor M3G084-DF
Phase 3~
Nominal voltage / VAC 400
Nominal voltage
range / VAC
380 .. 480
Frequency / Hz 50/60
Method of obtaining
data
ml
Speed (rpm) / min-1 3100
Power consumption / W 300
Current draw / A 0.5
Min. ambient
temperature / °C
-25
Max. ambient
temperature / °C
60
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment
Subject to change
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/
2011
Actual Req. 2015
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 48.9 44.9
02 Measurement category A
03 Efficiency category Static
04 Efficiency grade N 65 61
05 Variable speed drive Yes
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label.
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
08 Type K3G250-RR17-M9
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.29
09 Air flow qv/ m³/h 905
09 Pressure increase total psf /
Pa
511
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 3105
11 Specific ratio*1.01
12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and
maintenance is provided in the operating
instructions.
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
measurement category are detailed in the
CE declaration.
*Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller
combination in a standardized measurement setup.
3.4 Technical description
Weight 11.8 kg
Fan size 250 mm
Rotor surface Painted black
Electronics housing
material
Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Impeller material PA plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
plastic (RAL 9005)
Number of blades 7
Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
Degree of protection IP55
Insulation class "F"
Moisture (F) /
Environmental (H)
protection class
H1
Installation position Any
Condensation
drainage holes
None
Mode S1
Motor bearing Ball bearing
Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
- Operation and alarm display
- External 24 V input (parameter setting)
- Alarm relay
- Integrated PID controller
- Motor current limitation
- PFC, passive
- RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
- Soft start
- EEPROM write cycles: 100,000
maximum
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
- Control interface with SELV potential
safely disconnected from the mains
- Thermal overload protection for
electronics/motor
- Line undervoltage / phase failure
detection
Touch current
according to IEC
60990 (measuring
circuit Fig. 4, TN
system)
<= 3.5 mA
Electrical hookup Via terminal box
Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
internally connected
Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
customer to the housing's connection point)
Conformity with
standards
EN 61800-5-1; CE
Approval UL 1004-7 + 60730; C22.2 No.77 +
CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC
Comment Operational is only permitted with the
optional guard grill available from ebm-
papst.
Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 5 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
285
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for
support.
;Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection.
Information on surface quality
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty.
3.5 Mounting data
;Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self-
locking screws).
Strength class of
screws
8.8
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions
Max. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
+80 °C
Min. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
-40 °C
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
EMC immunity to
interference
According to EN 61000-6-2 (industrial
environment)
EMC circuit feedback According to EN 61000-3-2/3
EMC interference
emission
According to EN 61000-6-3 (household
environment)
If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side
so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 16-
75 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12
provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point
of the customer system to the public power system is greater
than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/
owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation
with the network operator, that this device is only connected to
a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal
to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
4.1 Mechanical connection
CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
from packaging
→ Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
→ Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
CAUTION
Heavy load when unpacking device
Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
→ Two people should work together to remove the device from
its packaging.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
attachment of the fan to the substructure.
;The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
;Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
be installed.
;Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
CAUTION
Possible damage to the device
If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
●The fan must not be strained on fastening.
4.2 Electrical connection
DANGER
Voltage on the device
Electric shock
→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.
Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 6 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
286
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
DANGER
Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
and PE connections.
CAUTION
Voltage
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch.
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being
switched back on.
NOTE
Device malfunctions possible
Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line.
→ Maintain the greatest possible clearance.
Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable
routing)
NOTE
Water ingress into wires or cables
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the
device.
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry
environment.
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
4.2.1 Requirements
;Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data.
;Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches
the device voltage.
;Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the
nameplate.
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor.
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum
cable cross-section is at least
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
symbol and a hole.
4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses
Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line
protection only, no equipment protection).
Nominal
voltage
Fuse Automatic
circuit
breaker
Cable
cross-
section
Cable
cross-
section
VDE UL VDE mm² *AWG
3/PE AC
380-480
VAC
16 A 15 A C16A 1.5 16
* AWG = American Wire Gauge
4.2.3 Reactive currents
Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
on.
●The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
●At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
(operational readiness) is typically < 5 W.
4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
(type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
while operating the device. When the device power supply is
switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
4.2.5 Leakage current
For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the
leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value.
4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection
Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
4.3 Connection in terminal box
4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection
Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
NOTE
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
used.
→ This must be checked by the user.
Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 7 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
287
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
;Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
;Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
box.
;First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
;Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
;Seal the terminal box.
4.3.3 Cable routing
Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.
4.4 Factory settings
Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 5
Save set value to
EEPROM
Yes
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action
parameter set 1
Positive (heating)
Direction of action
parameter set 2
Positive (heating)
Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 8 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
288
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.5 Connection diagram
Drawing preliminary!
No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment
1 1, 2 PE green/
yellow
Protective earth
1 3 L1 black Power supply
1 4 L2 black Power supply
1 5 L3 black Power supply
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
insulation on control interface side
2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value), 0-10 V, Ri = 100 kΩ, adjustable curve, SELV
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV
2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV
2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot), SELV
fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply
Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 9 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
289
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.6 Checking connections
;Ensure isolation from supply (all phases).
;Make sure a restart is impossible
;Check the cables for proper fit.
;Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
;Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover
closes without resistance.
;Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
the threads.
;Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.
4.7 Switching on the device
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or
similar connectors by the customer.
WARNING
Hot motor housing
Risk of fire
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
located close to the fan.
;Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
;Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any
foreign matter found.
;Apply the nominal supply voltage.
;Start the device by changing the input signal.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be
determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
failure.
4.8 Switching off the device
Switching off the device during operation:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
Switching off the device for maintenance:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
;Disconnect the device from the power supply.
;When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
Fault Safety feature description/
function
Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
Blocked rotor ;After the blockage is
removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
Line undervoltage (line voltage
outside of permitted nominal
voltage range)
;If the line voltage returns to
permitted values, the motor
restarts automatically.
Phase failure A phase of the supply voltage
fails for at least 5 s.
;When all phases are
correctly supplied again, the
motor automatically restarts after
10-40 s.
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
papst for repair or replacement.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
Impeller not
running smoothly
Imbalance in rotating
parts
Clean the device;
replace it if imbalance
persists after cleaning.
Make sure no
weight clips are
removed during
cleaning.
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate
from supply and
remove mechanical
blockage.
Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 10 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
290
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage,
restore power supply.
Attention! The error
message resets
automatically.
Device restarts
automatically without
warning.
Faulty connection Isolate from supply,
correct connection;
see connection
diagram.
Broken motor winding Replace device
Thermal overload
protector activated
Allow motor to cool
off, locate and rectify
cause of error,
release restart lockout
if necessary
Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let
the device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
Ambient temperature
too high
Reduce the ambient
temperature. Let the
device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
Impermissible point of
operation (e.g. back
pressure too high)
Correct the operating
point. Let the device
cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
6.1 Vibration testing
Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of
the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation
situation.
6.2 Cleaning
NOTE
Damage to the device during cleaning
Malfunction possible
→ Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
→ Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
6.3 Safety inspection
NOTE
High-voltage test
The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
→ Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
the standard.
What to check How to check How often What action?
Contact
protection
cover for
intactness or
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Repair or
replacement of
device
Device for
damage to
blades and
housing
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replacement of
device
Fastening the
cables
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 11 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
291
Operating instructions
K3G250-RR17-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
Fastening the
protective earth
terminal
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Insulation of
cables for
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replace cables
Impeller for
wear/deposits/
corrosion and
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Clean or
replace impeller
Tightness of
cable gland
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Retighten,
replace if
damaged
Abnormal
bearing noise
acoustic At least every
6 months
Replace device
6.4 Disposal
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
top priority corporate goals.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.
6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.
6.4.3 Component disposal
The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
●Steel and iron
●Aluminum
●Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
●Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
●Insulating materials
●Cables and wires
●Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
;Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
●Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
●Power cables
●Cables for internal wiring
●Electrolytic capacitors
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.
→ Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
Item no. 55701-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 12 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
292
D.10 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing,
SH225
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 293
Additional documents
D.10 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, pressing, SH225
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
294 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110
info1@de.ebmpapst.com
www.ebmpapst.com
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
11. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
danger to persons.
These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
11.1 Hazard levels for warnings
These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
actions are not taken.
NOTE
A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
lead to property damage.
1.2 Staff qualifications
11.2 Staff qualifications
The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
authorized technical staff.
Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
1.3 Basic safety rules
11.3 Basic safety rules
The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
following installation in the final product.
Note the following when working on the device:
;Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
1.4 Voltage
11.4 Voltage
;Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.3 Safety inspection.
;Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
21.5 Safety and protective features
21.6 Electromagnetic radiation
21.7 Mechanical movement
21.8 Emissions
21.9 Hot surface
21.10 Transport
21.11 Storage
32. INTENDED USE
43. TECHNICAL DATA
43.1 Product drawing
53.2 Nominal data
53.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011
53.4 Technical description
63.5 Mounting data
63.6 Transport and storage conditions
63.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
64. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
64.1 Mechanical connection
64.2 Electrical connection
74.3 Connection in terminal box
84.4 Factory settings
94.5 Connection diagram
104.6 Checking connections
104.7 Switching on the device
104.8 Switching off the device
105. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
116. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
116.1 Vibration testing
126.2 Cleaning
126.3 Safety inspection
126.4 Disposal
Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 1 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
295
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation.
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
1.5 Safety and protective features
DANGER
Protective device missing and protective device not
functioning
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and
guard grille.
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example.
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured
adequately.
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
ineffective protective device.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
with open- and closed-loop control devices.
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate
shielding measures have to be taken by the user.
NOTE
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment.
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant.
1.7 Mechanical movement
DANGER
Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
the impeller.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill.
WARNING
Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
can result.
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
while working on rotating parts.
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
1.8 Emissions
WARNING
Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
→ Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
equipment such as hearing protection.
→ Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
1.9 Hot surface
CAUTION
High temperature on electronics housing
Risk of burns
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
1.10 Transport
WARNING
Transporting the fan
Injuries from tipping or slipping
→ The fan is always to be transported with care and in its
original packaging. #If set down too hard or at an angle for
example, the impact can lead to bearing damage or
deformation of the frame or impeller. #It must be ensured that
the fans cannot tip over during transportation and handling.
→ Secure the fan(s) with appropriate equipment such as a
lashing strip so that nothing can slip or tip, especially when
stacking multiple fans. #Also make allowance for possible
wind forces.
1.11 Storage
;Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
packaging in a clean environment.
;Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
;We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
service life.
;Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
described prior to commissioning.
;Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
;Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.
Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 2 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
296
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
●Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/
TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems.
●The device is to be used in networks with network quality
characteristics as per EN 50160.
●Use of the device in stationary systems only.
●Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
●Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
●Operating the device with all protective devices.
●Following the operating instructions.
Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
●Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
●Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
●Opening the terminal box during operation.
●Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
●Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
●Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
●Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
●Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
●Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
●Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
●In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.
Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 3 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
297
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3. TECHNICAL DATA
3.1 Product drawing
All dimensions in mm.
1Terminal strip
1.1 PE
1.2 L1
1.3 L2
1.4 L3
1.5 NC
1.6 COM
1.7 GND
1.8 0-10 V
1.9 +10 V
2Tightening torque 1.2±0.2 Nm
3Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Accessory part: Guard grill 20225-2-4039, filter 99951-2-5170 and filter mount 25225-2-4041 not included in scope of delivery.
Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 4 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
298
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
3.2 Nominal data
Motor M3G084-DF
Phase 3~
Nominal voltage / VAC 400
Nominal voltage
range / VAC
380 .. 480
Frequency / Hz 50/60
Method of obtaining
data
ml
Status prelim.
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2700
Power consumption / W 550
Current draw / A 0.9
Min. ambient
temperature / °C
-25
Max. ambient
temperature / °C
60
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment
Subject to change
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/
2011
Actual Req. 2015
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 58.4 47.7
02 Measurement category A
03 Efficiency category Static
04 Efficiency grade N 71.7 61
05 Variable speed drive Yes
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label.
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
08 Type K3G280-RR04-M9
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.54
09 Air flow qv/ m³/h 1820
09 Pressure increase total psf /
Pa
573
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2720
11 Specific ratio*1.01
12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and
maintenance is provided in the operating
instructions.
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
measurement category are detailed in the
CE declaration.
*Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller
combination in a standardized measurement setup.
3.4 Technical description
Weight 17.5 kg
Fan size 280 mm
Rotor surface Painted black
Electronics housing
material
Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Impeller material PP plastic, galvanized sheet-metal plate
Housing material Die-cast aluminum
Support plate material Sheet steel, galvanized
Inlet nozzle material Sheet steel, galvanized
Guard grille material Steel, phosphated and coated with black
plastic (RAL 9005)
Number of blades 6
Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
Degree of protection IP55
Insulation class "F"
Moisture (F) /
Environmental (H)
protection class
H1
Installation position Any
Condensation
drainage holes
None
Mode S1
Motor bearing Ball bearing
Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
- Operation and alarm display
- External 24 V input (parameter setting)
- Alarm relay
- Integrated PID controller
- Motor current limitation
- PFC, passive
- RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
- Soft start
- EEPROM write cycles: 100,000
maximum
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
- Control interface with SELV potential
safely disconnected from the mains
- Thermal overload protection for
electronics/motor
- Line undervoltage / phase failure
detection
Touch current
according to IEC
60990 (measuring
circuit Fig. 4, TN
system)
<= 3.5 mA
Electrical hookup Via terminal box
Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
internally connected
Protection class I (if protective earth is connected by
customer to the housing's connection point)
Conformity with
standards
EN 61800-5-1; CE
Approval UL 1004-7 + 60730; C22.2 No.77 +
CAN/CSA-E60730-1; EAC
Comment Operational is only permitted with the
optional guard grill available from ebm-
papst.
Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 5 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
299
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for
support.
;Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection.
Information on surface quality
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty.
3.5 Mounting data
;Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self-
locking screws).
Strength class of
screws
8.8
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions
Max. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
+80 °C
Min. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
-40 °C
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side
so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 16-
75 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12
provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point
of the customer system to the public power system is greater
than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/
owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation
with the network operator, that this device is only connected to
a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal
to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
4.1 Mechanical connection
CAUTION
Risk of cutting and crushing when removing device
from packaging
→ Carefully remove the device from the packaging by grasping
hold of the frame. Never subject to any impact.
→ Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
CAUTION
Heavy load when unpacking device
Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
→ Two people should work together to remove the device from
its packaging.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
from sections of the installation. #If the fan is connected to air
ducts, the connection should be isolated from vibration, e.g.
using compensators or similar elements. #Ensure stress-free
attachment of the fan to the substructure.
;The fan may not be handled in the area around the inlet nozzle during
transport and installation.
There is a risk of damage to the impeller.
;Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
be installed.
;Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
CAUTION
Possible damage to the device
If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
●The fan must not be strained on fastening.
4.2 Electrical connection
DANGER
Voltage on the device
Electric shock
→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.
Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 6 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
300
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
DANGER
Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
and PE connections.
CAUTION
Voltage
The fan is a built-in component and has no disconnecting switch.
→ Only connect the fan to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
→ When working on the fan, secure the system/machine in
which the fan is installed so as to prevent it from being
switched back on.
NOTE
Device malfunctions possible
Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line.
→ Maintain the greatest possible clearance.
Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable
routing)
NOTE
Water ingress into wires or cables
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the
device.
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry
environment.
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
4.2.1 Requirements
;Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data.
;Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches
the device voltage.
;Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the
nameplate.
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor.
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum
cable cross-section is at least
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
symbol and a hole.
4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses
Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line
protection only, no equipment protection).
Nominal
voltage
Fuse Automatic
circuit
breaker
Cable
cross-
section
Cable
cross-
section
VDE UL VDE mm² *AWG
3/PE AC
380-480
VAC
16 A 15 A C16A 1.5 16
* AWG = American Wire Gauge
4.2.3 Reactive currents
Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
on.
●The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
●At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
(operational readiness) is typically < 5 W.
4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
(type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
while operating the device. When the device power supply is
switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
4.2.5 Leakage current
For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the
leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value.
4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection
Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
4.3 Connection in terminal box
4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection
Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
NOTE
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
used.
→ This must be checked by the user.
Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 7 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
301
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
;Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
;Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
box.
;First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
;Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
;Seal the terminal box.
4.3.3 Cable routing
Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.# If this is not possible, a drip edge can
be produced by fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable
gland for example.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.
4.4 Factory settings
Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 5
Save set value to
EEPROM
Yes
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action
parameter set 1
Positive (heating)
Direction of action
parameter set 2
Positive (heating)
Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 8 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
302
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.5 Connection diagram
Drawing preliminary!
No. Conn. Designation Color Function/assignment
1 1, 2 PE green/
yellow
Protective earth
1 3 L1 black Power supply
1 4 L2 black Power supply
1 5 L3 black Power supply
1 6 NC white 1 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
insulation on control interface side
1 7 COM white 2 Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic
insulation on control interface side
2 8 0-10V yellow Analog input (set value), 0-10 V, Ri = 100 kΩ, adjustable curve, SELV
2 10 RSB brown RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV
2 11 RSA white RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV
2 12 GND blue Reference ground for control interface, SELV
2 13 +10V red Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, +10 V ±3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof power supply for
external devices (e.g. pot), SELV
fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply
Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 9 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
303
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.6 Checking connections
;Ensure isolation from supply (all phases).
;Make sure a restart is impossible
;Check the cables for proper fit.
;Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
;Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover
closes without resistance.
;Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
the threads.
;Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.
4.7 Switching on the device
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or
similar connectors by the customer.
WARNING
Hot motor housing
Risk of fire
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
located close to the fan.
;Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
;Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any
foreign matter found.
;Apply the nominal supply voltage.
;Start the device by changing the input signal.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the
entire speed control range. #Severe vibration can arise for
instance from inexpert handling, transportation damage and
resultant imbalance or be caused by component or structural
resonance. #Speed ranges with excessively high vibration
levels and possibly resonant frequencies must be
determined in the course of fan commissioning. #Either run
through the resonant range as quickly as possible with
speed control or find another remedy.# Operation with
excessively high vibration levels can lead to premature
failure.
→ The maximum permissible vibration severity must not
exceed 3.5 mm/s and should be checked at intervals of 6
months. #It is to be measured at the motor mount at the
motor support plate in all three 3 dimensions, see Chapter 6.
Maintenance, malfunctions, possible causes and remedies.
4.8 Switching off the device
Switching off the device during operation:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
Switching off the device for maintenance:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
;Disconnect the device from the power supply.
;When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
Fault Safety feature description/
function
Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
Blocked rotor ;After the blockage is
removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
Line undervoltage (line voltage
outside of permitted nominal
voltage range)
;If the line voltage returns to
permitted values, the motor
restarts automatically.
Phase failure A phase of the supply voltage
fails for at least 5 s.
;When all phases are
correctly supplied again, the
motor automatically restarts after
10-40 s.
Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 10 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
304
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
papst for repair or replacement.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.# When working on
the device, switch off the line voltage and ensure that it
cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
Impeller not
running smoothly
Imbalance in rotating
parts
Clean the device;
replace it if imbalance
persists after cleaning.
Make sure no
weight clips are
removed during
cleaning.
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate
from supply and
remove mechanical
blockage.
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage,
restore power supply.
Attention! The error
message resets
automatically.
Device restarts
automatically without
warning.
Faulty connection Isolate from supply,
correct connection;
see connection
diagram.
Broken motor winding Replace device
Thermal overload
protector activated
Allow motor to cool
off, locate and rectify
cause of error,
release restart lockout
if necessary
Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let
the device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
Ambient temperature
too high
Reduce the ambient
temperature. Let the
device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
Impermissible point of
operation (e.g. back
pressure too high)
Correct the operating
point. Let the device
cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
6.1 Vibration testing
Checking of fan for mechanical vibration based on ISO 14694.
Recommendation: Every 6 months. Max. vibration severity is 3.5 mm/
s, measured at the motor fastening diameter on the motor support plate in
the direction of the motor axis of rotation and perpendicular to this.
Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 11 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
305
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
Fig. 1: Example illustrating vibration measurement. The arrangement of
the sensors depends on the device concerned and the installation
situation.
6.2 Cleaning
NOTE
Damage to the device during cleaning
Malfunction possible
→ Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
→ Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
6.3 Safety inspection
NOTE
High-voltage test
The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
→ Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
the standard.
What to check How to check How often What action?
Contact
protection
cover for
intactness or
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Repair or
replacement of
device
Device for
damage to
blades and
housing
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replacement of
device
Fastening the
cables
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Fastening the
protective earth
terminal
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Insulation of
cables for
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replace cables
Impeller for
wear/deposits/
corrosion and
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Clean or
replace impeller
Tightness of
cable gland
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Retighten,
replace if
damaged
Abnormal
bearing noise
acoustic At least every
6 months
Replace device
Vibration test Vibration
measuring
device, start-up
or run-down
measurement
Recommended
every 6 months
Clean, re-
balance and if
necessary
replace impeller
6.4 Disposal
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
top priority corporate goals.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
6.4.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.
6.4.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.
6.4.3 Component disposal
The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
●Steel and iron
●Aluminum
●Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
●Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
●Insulating materials
●Cables and wires
●Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 12 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
306
Operating instructions
K3G280-RR04-M9
Siemens AG PD LD Nbg.
Translation of the original operating instructions
Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
;Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
●Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
●Power cables
●Cables for internal wiring
●Electrolytic capacitors
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.
→ Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
Item no. 55770-5-9970 · ENU · Change 94618 · Approved 2017-06-12 · Page 13 / 13
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
307
308
D.11 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction,
SH280
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 309
Additional documents
D.11 Operating instructions for the three-phase EC external fan, suction, SH280
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
310 Operating Instructions 01/2019
Operating instructions
G3G280-BR04-M7
Translation of the original operating instructions
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Bachmühle 2
D-74673 Mulfingen
Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0
Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110
info1@de.ebmpapst.com
www.ebmpapst.com
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
11. SAFETY REGULATIONS AND INFORMATION
Read these operating instructions carefully before starting work on the
device. Observe the following warnings to prevent malfunctions or
danger to persons.
These operating instructions are to be regarded as part of the device.
The device is only to be sold or passed on together with the operating
instructions.
These operating instructions may be duplicated and distributed to inform
about potential dangers and their prevention.
1.1 Hazard levels for warnings
11.1 Hazard levels for warnings
These operating instructions use the following hazard levels to indicate
potentially hazardous situations and important safety regulations:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Compliance with the instructions is imperative.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
death or serious injury if the specified actions are not taken.
Exercise extreme caution while working.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which can result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to property if the specified
actions are not taken.
NOTE
A potentially harmful situation can occur and, if not avoided, can
lead to property damage.
1.2 Staff qualifications
11.2 Staff qualifications
The device may only be transported, unpacked, installed, operated,
maintained and otherwise used by suitably qualified, trained and
authorized technical staff.
Only authorized specialists are permitted to install the device, to carry
out a test run and to perform work on the electrical installation.
1.3 Basic safety rules
11.3 Basic safety rules
The safety hazards associated with the device must be assessed again
following installation in the final product.
The locally applicable industrial safety regulations are always to be
observed when working on the device.
Keep the workplace clean and tidy. Untidiness in the work area
increases the risk of accidents.
Note the following when working on the device:
;Do not perform any modifications, additions or conversions on the
device without the approval of ebm-papst.
1.4 Voltage
11.4 Voltage
;Check the device's electrical equipment at regular intervals; see
Chapter 6.2 Safety inspection.
;Replace loose connections and defective cables immediately.
DANGER
Electrically charged device
Risk of electric shock
→ When working on an electrically charged device, stand on a
rubber mat.
21.5 Safety and protective features
21.6 Electromagnetic radiation
21.7 Mechanical movement
21.8 Emissions
21.9 Hot surface
21.10 Transport
21.11 Storage
32. INTENDED USE
43. TECHNICAL DATA
43.1 Product drawing
53.2 Nominal data
53.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/2011
53.4 Technical description
63.5 Mounting data
63.6 Transport and storage conditions
63.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
64. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
64.1 Mechanical connection
64.2 Electrical connection
84.3 Connection in terminal box
84.4 Factory settings
94.5 Connection diagram
104.6 Checking connections
104.7 Switching on the device
104.8 Switching off the device
105. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
106. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
116.1 Cleaning
116.2 Safety inspection
126.3 Disposal
Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 1 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
311
Operating instructions
G3G280-BR04-M7
Translation of the original operating instructions
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
In the event of a fault, the rotor and the impeller will be
energized
The rotor and the impeller have basic insulation.
→ Do not touch the rotor and impeller once installed.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.
→ When working on the device, switch off the line voltage
and ensure that it cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
1.5 Safety and protective features
DANGER
Protective device missing and protective device not
functioning
Without a protective device there is a risk of serious injury, for
instance when reaching into the device during operation.
→ Operate the device only with a fixed protective device and
guard grille.
→ The fixed protective device must be able to withstand the
kinetic energy of a fan blade that becomes detached at
maximum speed. There must not be any gaps which it is
possible to reach into with the fingers, for example.
→ The device is a built-in component. As the operator, you
are responsible for ensuring that the device is secured
adequately.
→ Stop the device immediately if you notice a missing or
ineffective protective device.
1.6 Electromagnetic radiation
Interference from electromagnetic radiation is possible, e.g. in conjunction
with open- and closed-loop control devices.
If impermissible radiation levels occur following installation, appropriate
shielding measures have to be taken by the user.
NOTE
Electrical or electromagnetic interference after installing
the device in customer equipment.
→ Verify that the entire setup is EMC-compliant.
1.7 Mechanical movement
DANGER
Rotating device
Risk of injury to body parts coming into contact with the rotor or
the impeller.
→ Secure the device against accidental contact.
→ Before working on the system/machine, wait until all
parts have come to a standstill.
WARNING
Rotating device
Long hair and dangling items of clothing, jewelry and the like
can become entangled and be pulled into the device. Injuries
can result.
→ Do not wear any loose-fitting or dangling clothing or jewelry
while working on rotating parts.
→ Protect long hair with a cap.
1.8 Emissions
WARNING
Depending on the installation and operating conditions,
the sound pressure level may exceed 70 dB(A).
Risk of noise-induced hearing loss
→ Take appropriate technical safety measures.
→ Protect operating personnel with appropriate safety
equipment such as hearing protection.
→ Also observe the requirements of local agencies.
1.9 Hot surface
CAUTION
High temperature on electronics housing
Risk of burns
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
1.10 Transport
NOTE
Transporting the device
→ Transport the device in its original packaging only.
→ Secure the device so it cannot slip, e.g. by using a
lashing strip.
1.11 Storage
;Store the device, partially or fully assembled, in a dry place,
protected against the weather and free from vibration, in the original
packaging in a clean environment.
;Protect the device against environmental effects and dirt until final
installation.
;We recommend storing the device for no longer than one year in
order to guarantee trouble-free operation and the longest possible
service life.
;Even devices explicitly intended for outdoor use are to be stored as
described prior to commissioning.
;Maintain the storage temperature, see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions.
;Make sure that all cable glands are fitted with dummy plugs.
Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 2 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
312
Operating instructions
G3G280-BR04-M7
Translation of the original operating instructions
2. INTENDED USE
The device is exclusively designed as a built-in device for conveying
air according to its technical data.
Any other usage above and beyond this does not conform with the
intended purpose and constitutes misuse of the device.
Customer equipment must be capable of withstanding the mechanical
and thermal stresses that can arise from this product. This applies for the
entire service life of the equipment in which this product is installed.
Intended use also includes
●Using the device only in power systems with grounded neutral (TN/
TT power systems) and in ungrounded IT power systems.
●The device is to be used in networks with network quality
characteristics as per EN 50160.
●Use of the device in stationary systems only.
●Conveying air at an ambient air pressure between 800 mbar and
1050 mbar.
●Using the device within the permitted ambient temperature range; see
Chapter 3.6 Transport and storage conditions and
Chapter 3.2 Nominal data.
●Operating the device with all protective devices.
●Following the operating instructions.
Improper use
In particular, operating the device in the following ways is prohibited and
could be hazardous:
●Operating the device in an unbalanced state, e.g. due to dirt deposits
or ice formation.
●Resonant operation, operation with severe vibration. This also
includes vibration transmitted to the fan from the customer installation.
●Opening the terminal box during operation.
●Conveying air that contains abrasive particles.
●Conveying highly corrosive air, e.g. salt spray. Exception: devices
designed for salt spray and correspondingly protected.
●Conveying air with high dust content, e.g. suctioning off sawdust.
●Operating the device close to flammable materials or components.
●Operating the device in an explosive atmosphere.
●Using the device as a safety component or to perform safety-related
functions.
●Operation with completely or partially disassembled or manipulated
protective devices.
●In addition, all applications not listed among the intended uses.
Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 3 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
313
Operating instructions
G3G280-BR04-M7
Translation of the original operating instructions
3. TECHNICAL DATA
3.1 Product drawing
All dimensions in mm.
1Cable diameter min. 8 mm, max. 12 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
2Cable diameter min. 6 mm, max. 10 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm
Cable diameter min. 4 mm, max. 7 mm, tightening torque 2.5 ± 0.4 Nm (included seal must be used)
3Tightening torque 1.5 ± 0.2 Nm
Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 4 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
314
Operating instructions
G3G280-BR04-M7
Translation of the original operating instructions
3.2 Nominal data
Motor M3G084-DF
Phase 3~
Nominal voltage / VAC 400
Nominal voltage
range / VAC
380 .. 480
Frequency / Hz 50/60
Method of obtaining
data
ml
Speed (rpm) / min-1 2700
Power consumption / W 530
Current draw / A 0.85
Min. ambient
temperature / °C
-25
Max. ambient
temperature / °C
60
ml = Max. load · me = Max. efficiency · fa = Free air
cs = Customer specification · ce = Customer equipment
Subject to change
3.3 Data according to Commission Regulation (EU) 327/
2011
Actual Req. 2015
01 Overall efficiency ηes / % 66 47.2
02 Measurement category A
03 Efficiency category Static
04 Efficiency grade N 79.8 61
05 Variable speed drive Yes
06 Year of manufacture The year of manufacture is specified on the
product's rating label.
07 Manufacturer ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG
Amtsgericht (court of registration) Stuttgart
· HRA 590344
D-74673 Mulfingen
08 Type G3G280-BR04-M7
09 Power consumption Ped / kW 0.48
09 Air flow qv/ m³/h 1505
09 Pressure increase total psf /
Pa
692
10 Speed (rpm) n / min-1 2710
11 Specific ratio*1.01
12 Recycling/disposal Information on recycling and disposal is
provided in the operating instructions.
13 Maintenance Information on installation, operation and
maintenance is provided in the operating
instructions.
14 Additional components Components used to calculate the energy
efficiency that are not apparent from the
measurement category are detailed in the
CE declaration.
*Specific ratio = 1 + pfs / 100 000 Pa
Data obtained at optimum efficiency level. The ErP data is determined using a motor-impeller
combination in a standardized measurement setup.
3.4 Technical description
Weight 15 kg
Size 280 mm
Motor size 84
Rotor surface Painted black
Terminal box material PP plastic
Electronics housing
material
Die-cast aluminum, painted black
Impeller material PP plastic
Number of blades 6
Direction of rotation Clockwise, viewed toward rotor
Degree of protection IP55
Insulation class "F"
Moisture (F) /
Environmental (H)
protection class
H1
Installation position Any
Condensation
drainage holes
None
Mode S1
Motor bearing Ball bearing; (sealed)
Technical features - Output 10 VDC, max. 10 mA
- Operation and alarm display
- External 24 V input (parameter setting)
- Alarm relay
- Integrated PID controller
- Motor current limitation
- PFC, passive
- RS-485 MODBUS-RTU
- Soft start
- EEPROM write cycles: 100,000
maximum
- Control input 0-10 VDC / PWM
- Control interface with SELV potential
safely disconnected from the mains
- Thermal overload protection for
electronics/motor
- Line undervoltage / phase failure
detection
Touch current
according to IEC
60990 (measuring
circuit Fig. 4, TN
system)
<= 3.5 mA
Electrical hookup Terminal box
Motor protection Thermal overload protector (TOP)
internally connected
Protection class I (with customer connection of protective
earth)
Conformity with
standards
EN 61800-5-1; CE
Approval CSA C22.2 No. 77 + CAN/CSA-
E60730-1; EAC; UL 1004-7 + 60730-1
With regard to cyclic speed loads, note that the rotating parts of
the device are designed for a maximum of one million load
cycles. If you have special questions, consult ebm-papst for
support.
;Use the device in accordance with its degree of protection.
Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 5 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
315
Operating instructions
G3G280-BR04-M7
Translation of the original operating instructions
Information on surface quality
The surfaces of the products conform to the generally applicable industrial
standard. The surface quality may change during the production period.
This has no effect on strength, dimensional stability and dimensional
accuracy.
The color pigments in the paints used perceptibly react to UV light over
the course of time. This does not however in any way affect the
technical properties of the products. The product is to be protected against
UV radiation to prevent the formation of patches and fading. Changes in
color are not a reason for complaint and are not covered by the warranty.
3.5 Mounting data
Strength class of
screws
8.8
;Secure the screws against unintentional loosening (e.g. use self-
locking screws).
Any further mounting data required can be taken from the product
drawing or Section Chapter 4.1 Mechanical connection.
3.6 Transport and storage conditions
Max. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
+80 °C
Min. permitted
ambient temp. for
motor (transport/
storage)
-40 °C
3.7 Electromagnetic compatibility
If several devices are switched in parallel on the supply side
so that the line current of the arrangement is in the range of 16-
75 A, then this arrangement conforms to IEC 61000-3-12
provided that the short-circuit power Ssc at the connection point
of the customer system to the public power system is greater
than or equal to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
It is the responsibility of the installation engineer or operator/
owner of the device to ensure, if necessary after consultation
with the network operator, that this device is only connected to
a connection point with a Ssc value that is greater than or equal
to 120 times the rated output of the arrangement.
4. CONNECTION AND STARTUP
4.1 Mechanical connection
CAUTION
Cutting and crushing hazard when removing blower
from packaging
→ Carefully remove the blower from its packaging, touching
only the housing. Strictly avoid shocks.
→ Wear safety shoes and cut-resistant safety gloves.
CAUTION
Heavy load when unpacking device
Risk of physical injury, such as back injuries.
→ Two people should work together to remove the device from
its packaging.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ The fan must not be subjected to force or excessive vibration
from sections of the installation.
→ If the fan is connected to air ducts, the connection should
be isolated from vibration, e.g. using compensators or similar
elements.
→ Ensure stress-free attachment of the fan to the
substructure.
;Check the device for transport damage. Damaged devices are not to
be installed.
;Install the undamaged device in accordance with your application.
CAUTION
Possible damage to the device
If the device slips during installation, serious damage can result.
→ Ensure that the device is securely positioned at its place of
installation until all fastening screws have been tightened.
●The fan must not be strained on fastening.
4.2 Electrical connection
DANGER
Voltage on the device
Electric shock
→ Always connect a protective earth first.
→ Check the protective earth.
DANGER
Faulty insulation
Risk of fatal injury from electric shock
→ Use only cables that meet the specified installation
regulations for voltage, current, insulation material, capacity,
etc.
→ Route cables so that they cannot be touched by any
rotating parts.
DANGER
Electrical charge (>50 µC) between phase conductor and
protective earth connection after switching off supply
with multiple devices connected in parallel.
Electric shock, risk of injury
Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 6 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
316
Operating instructions
G3G280-BR04-M7
Translation of the original operating instructions
→ Ensure sufficient protection against accidental contact.
Before working on the electrical hookup, short the supply
and PE connections.
CAUTION
Voltage
The device is a built-in component and has no disconnecting
switch.
→ Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off
with an all-pole disconnection switch.
→ When working on the device, secure the system/
machine in which the device is installed so as to prevent it
from being switched back on.
NOTE
Device malfunctions possible
Route the device's control lines separately from the supply line.
→ Maintain the greatest possible clearance.
Recommendation: clearance > 10 cm (separate cable
routing)
NOTE
Water ingress into wires or cables
Water ingress at the customer end of the cable can damage the
device.
→ Make sure the end of the cable is connected in a dry
environment.
Only connect the device to circuits that can be switched off with
an all-pole disconnection switch.
4.2.1 Requirements
;Check whether the information on the nameplate matches the
connection data.
;Before connecting the device, make sure the power supply matches
the device voltage.
;Only use cables designed for the current level indicated on the
nameplate.
For determining the cross-section, note the sizing criteria according
to EN 61800-5-1. The protective earth must have a cross-section
equal to or greater than that of the phase conductor.
We recommend the use of 105 °C cables. Ensure that the minimum
cable cross-section is at least
AWG 26 / 0.13 mm².
Protective earth contact resistance according to EN 61800-5-1
Compliance with the resistance specifications according to EN 61800-5-
1 for the protective earth connection circuit must be verified in the end
application. Depending on the installation situation, it may be necessary
to connect an additional protective earth conductor by way of the extra
protective earth terminal provided on the device. The protective earth
terminal is located on the housing and provided with a protective earth
symbol and a hole.
4.2.2 Supply connection and fuses
Assignment of supply cable cross-sections and their required fuses (line
protection only, no equipment protection).
Nominal
voltage
Fuse Automatic
circuit
breaker
Cable
cross-
section
Cable
cross-
section
VDE UL VDE mm² *AWG
3/PE AC
380-480
VAC
16 A 15 A C16A 1.5 16
3/PE AC
380-480
VAC
20 A 20 A C20A 2.5 14
3/PE AC
380-480
VAC
25 A 25 A C25A 4.0 12
* AWG = American Wire Gauge
4.2.3 Reactive currents
Because of the EMC filter integrated for compliance with EMC
limits (interference emission and immunity to interference),
reactive currents can be measured in the supply line even
when the motor is at a standstill and the line voltage is switched
on.
●The values are typically in the range < 250 mA
●At the same time, the effective power in this operating state
(operational readiness) is typically < 5 W.
4.2.4 Residual current circuit breaker (RCCB)
If the use of a residual current device (RCD) is required in your
installation, only AC/DC-sensitive residual current devices
(type B or B+) are permissible. As with variable frequency
drives, residual current devices cannot provide personal safety
while operating the device. When the device power supply is
switched on, pulsed charging currents from the capacitors in the
integrated EMC filter can lead to the instant tripping of residual
current devices. We recommend the use of residual current
circuit breakers (RCCB) with a trip threshold of 300 mA and
delayed tripping (super-resistant, characteristic K).
4.2.5 Leakage current
For asymmetrical power systems or if a phase fails, the
leakage current can increase to a multiple of the nominal value.
4.2.6 Locked-rotor protection
Due to the locked-rotor protection, the starting current (LRA) is
equal to or less than the nominal current (FLA).
Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 7 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
317
Operating instructions
G3G280-BR04-M7
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.3 Connection in terminal box
4.3.1 Preparing cables for connection
Fig. 1: Recommended stripped lengths in mm (inside terminal box)
Only strip the cable as far as necessary, ensuring that the cable gland is
sealed and there is no strain on the connections. For tightening torques,
see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
NOTE
Tightness and strain relief are dependent on the cable
used.
→ This must be checked by the user.
4.3.2 Connecting wires to terminals
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
;Remove the cap from the cable gland.
Only remove caps where cables are fed in.
;Route the wire(s) (not included in scope of delivery) into the terminal
box.
;First connect the "PE" (protective earth).
;Connect the wires to the corresponding terminals.
Use a screwdriver to do so.
When connecting, ensure that no wire ends fan out.
;Seal the terminal box.
4.3.3 Cable routing
Water must be prevented from reaching the cable gland along the cable.
NOTE
Damage caused by moisture penetration.
Moisture can penetrate into the terminal box if water is
constantly present at the cable glands.
→ To prevent the constant accumulation of water at the cable
glands, the cable should be routed in a U-shaped loop
wherever possible.
→ If this is not possible, a drip edge can be produced by
fitting a cable tie directly in front of the cable gland for example.
Fig. 2: Fan installed lying flat, cable routed in a U-shaped loop.
When routing the cable, make sure that the cable glands are located at
the bottom. The cables must always be routed downward.
Fig. 3: Cable routing for fans installed upright.
4.4 Factory settings
Factory settings made for the device by ebm-papst.
Mode parameter set 1 PWM control
Mode parameter set 2 PWM control
Fan/device address 01
Max. PWM / % 100
Min. PWM / % 5
Save set value to
EEPROM
Yes
Set value requirement Analog (linear)
Direction of action
parameter set 1
Positive (heating)
Direction of action
parameter set 2
Positive (heating)
Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 8 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
318
Operating instructions
G3G280-BR04-M7
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.5 Connection diagram
No. Conn. Designation Function/assignment
1 PE Protective earth
2 PE Protective earth
3 L1 Power supply
4 L2 Power supply
5 L3 Power supply
6 NC Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation
on control interface side
7 COM Status relay, floating status contact, break for failure,
contact rating 250 VAC / 2 A (AC1) / min. 10 mA; reinforced insulation on supply side and basic insulation
on control interface side
8 GND Reference ground for control interface, SELV
9 RSA RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSA; SELV
10 RSB RS485 interface for MODBUS, RSB; SELV
11 0-10 V Analog input (set value) SELV, 0-10 V, Ri = 100 kΩ, adjustable curve, jumpered to +10 V corresponds to
100% PWM
12 +10 V / 24 V IN Fixed voltage output 10 VDC, SELV, +10 V ±3%, max. 10 mA, short-circuit-proof, power supply for external
devices (e.g. pot);
fixed voltage input 24 VDC for setting parameters via MODBUS without line voltage supply
Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 9 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
319
Operating instructions
G3G280-BR04-M7
Translation of the original operating instructions
4.6 Checking connections
;Ensure isolation from supply (all phases).
;Make sure a restart is impossible
;Check the cables for proper fit.
;Screw the terminal box cover back on again. Terminal box tightening
torque, see Chapter 3.1 Product drawing.
;Route the cables in the terminal box so that the terminal box cover
closes without resistance.
;Use all screw plugs. Insert the screws by hand to avoid damage to
the threads.
;Make sure the terminal box is completely closed and sealed and that
all screws and cable glands have been properly tightened.
4.7 Switching on the device
The device may only be switched on if it has been installed properly and
in accordance with its intended use, including the required safety
mechanisms and professional electrical hookup. This also applies for
devices which have already been equipped with plugs and terminals or
similar connectors by the customer.
WARNING
Hot motor housing
Risk of fire
→ Ensure that no combustible or flammable materials are
located close to the blower.
;Before switching on, check the device for visible external damage
and make sure the protective devices are functional.
;Check the fan's air flow paths for foreign matter and remove any
foreign matter found.
;Apply the nominal supply voltage.
;Start the device by changing the input signal.
NOTE
Damage to the device from vibration
Bearing damage, shorter service life
→ Low-vibration operation of the fan must be ensured over the
entire speed control range.
→ Severe vibration can arise for instance from inexpert
handling, transportation damage and resultant imbalance or
be caused by component or structural resonance.
→ Speed ranges with excessively high vibration levels and
possibly resonant frequencies must be determined in the
course of fan commissioning.
→ Either run through the resonant range as quickly as
possible with speed control or find another remedy.
→ Operation with excessively high vibration levels can
lead to premature failure.
4.8 Switching off the device
Switching off the device during operation:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
Switching off the device for maintenance:
;Switch off the device via the control input.
;Do not switch the motor (e.g. in cyclic operation) on and off via power
supply.
;Disconnect the device from the power supply.
;When disconnecting, be sure to disconnect the ground connection last.
5. INTEGRATED PROTECTIVE FEATURES
The integrated protective functions cause the motor to switch off
automatically in the event of the faults described in the table.
Fault Safety feature description/
function
Rotor position detection error An automatic restart follows.
Blocked rotor ;After the blockage is
removed, the motor restarts
automatically.
Line undervoltage (line voltage
outside of permitted nominal
voltage range)
;If the line voltage returns to
permitted values, the motor
restarts automatically.
Phase failure A phase of the supply voltage
fails for at least 5 s.
;When all phases are
correctly supplied again, the
motor automatically restarts after
10-40 s.
6. MAINTENANCE, MALFUNCTIONS, POSSIBLE
CAUSES AND REMEDIES
Do not perform any repairs on your device. Send the device to ebm-
papst for repair or replacement.
WARNING
Live terminals and connections even with device
switched off
Electric shock
→ Wait five minutes after disconnecting the voltage at all poles
before opening the device.
CAUTION
If control voltage or a stored speed set value is applied,
the motor will restart automatically, e.g. after a power
failure.
Risk of injury
→ Keep out of the device’s danger zone.
→ When working on the device, switch off the line voltage
and ensure that it cannot be switched back on.
→ Wait until the device comes to a stop.
→ After working on the device, remove any tools or other
objects from the device.
If the device is out of use for some time, e.g. when in storage,
we recommend switching it on for at least two hours to allow
any condensation to evaporate and to move the bearings.
Malfunction/fault Possible cause Possible remedy
Impeller not
running smoothly
Imbalance in rotating
parts
Clean the device;
replace it if imbalance
persists after cleaning.
Make sure no
weight clips are
removed during
cleaning.
Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 10 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
320
Operating instructions
G3G280-BR04-M7
Translation of the original operating instructions
Motor not turning Mechanical blockage Switch off, isolate
from supply and
remove mechanical
blockage.
Line voltage faulty Check line voltage,
restore power supply.
Attention! The error
message resets
automatically.
Device restarts
automatically without
warning.
Faulty connection Isolate from supply,
correct connection;
see connection
diagram.
Broken motor winding Replace device
Thermal overload
protector activated
Allow motor to cool
off, locate and rectify
cause of error,
release restart lockout
if necessary
Deficient cooling Improve cooling. Let
the device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
Ambient temperature
too high
Reduce the ambient
temperature. Let the
device cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
Impermissible point of
operation (e.g. back
pressure too high)
Correct the operating
point. Let the device
cool down.
To reset the error
message, switch off
the line voltage for at
least 25 s and then
switch it on again.
Alternatively, reset
the error message by
applying a control
signal of < 0.5 V to
Din1 or by shorting
Din1 to GND.
In the event of further malfunctions, contact ebm-papst.
6.1 Cleaning
NOTE
Damage to the device during cleaning
Malfunction possible
→ Do not clean the device using a high-pressure cleaner.
→ Do not use acid, alkali or solvent-based cleaning agents.
→ Do not use any pointed or sharp-edged objects for cleaning
6.2 Safety inspection
NOTE
High-voltage test
The integrated EMC filter has Y capacitors. The tripping current
is exceeded when AC testing voltage is applied.
→ Test the device with DC voltage when you perform the
legally required high-voltage test. The voltage to be used
corresponds to the peak value of the AC voltage required by
the standard.
What to check How to check How often What action?
Contact
protection
cover for
intactness or
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Repair or
replacement of
device
Device for
damage to
blades and
housing
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replacement of
device
Fastening the
cables
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Fasten
Insulation of
cables for
damage
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Replace cables
Tightness of
cable gland
Visual inspection At least every
6 months
Retighten,
replace if
damaged
Abnormal
bearing noise
acoustic At least every
6 months
Replace device
Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 11 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
321
Operating instructions
G3G280-BR04-M7
Translation of the original operating instructions
6.3 Disposal
For ebm-papst, environmental protection and resource preservation are
top priority corporate goals.
ebm-papst operates an environmental management system which is
certified in accordance with ISO 14001 and rigorously implemented
around the world on the basis of German standards.
Right from the development stage, ecological design, technical safety
and health protection are fixed criteria.
The following section contains recommendations for ecological disposal
of the product and its components.
6.3.1 Country-specific legal requirements
NOTE
Country-specific legal requirements
Always observe the applicable country-specific legal
regulations with regard to the disposal of products or waste
occurring in the various phases of the life cycle. The
corresponding disposal standards are also to be heeded.
6.3.2 Disassembly
Disassembly of the product must be performed or supervised by
qualified personnel with the appropriate technical knowledge.
The product is to be disassembled into suitable components for disposal
employing standard procedures for motors.
WARNING
Heavy parts of the product may drop off. Some of the
product components are heavy. These components
could drop off during disassembly.
This can result in fatal or serious injury and material damage.
→ Secure components before unfastening to stop them falling.
6.3.3 Component disposal
The products are mostly made of steel, copper, aluminum and plastic.
Metallic materials are generally considered to be fully recyclable.
Separate the components for recycling into the following categories:
●Steel and iron
●Aluminum
●Non-ferrous metal, e.g. motor windings
●Plastics, particularly with brominated flame retardants, in accordance
with marking
●Insulating materials
●Cables and wires
●Electronic scrap, e.g. circuit boards
Only ferrite magnets and not rare earth magnets are used in external
rotor motors from ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG.
;Ferrite magnets can be disposed of in the same way as normal iron
and steel.
Electrical insulating materials on the product, in cables and wires are
made of similar materials and are therefore to be treated in the same
manner.
The materials concerned are as follows:
●Miscellaneous insulators used in the terminal box
●Power cables
●Cables for internal wiring
●Electrolytic capacitors
Dispose of electronic components employing the proper procedures for
electronic scrap.
→ Please contact ebm-papst for any other questions on disposal.
Item no. 56754-5-9970 · ENU · Change 200100 · Approved 2018-10-04 · Page 12 / 12
ebm-papst Mulfingen GmbH & Co. KG · Bachmühle 2 · D-74673 Mulfingen · Phone +49 (0) 7938 81-0 · Fax +49 (0) 7938 81-110 · info1@de.ebmpapst.com · www.ebmpapst.com
322
Index
"
"Siemens Industry Online Support" App, 162
5
5 safety rules, 15
A
Air discharge throttle metal plate, 81
Aligning, 60
Prerequisites, 54
Alignment accuracy, 63
Aluminum conductors, 73
Anti-condensation heating, 33, 98
installation, 135
Insulation resistance, 53
Anti-corrosion agent
Removing, 55
Anti-freeze, 44
Anti-freeze protection, 44
Application range, 21
B
Bearing currents, 46, 84
Bearing insulation, 47
Bearing seizure damage, 41
Bearing shield
Assembly, 123
Disassembly, 123
Bearing temperature
Monitoring, 93
Set values, 93
Bolt locking device, 163
C
Cable lug, 71
Cable outlet direction, 82
Center of gravity, 37, 58
Certificates
EAC, 23
UL and cUL, 24
Checks to be carried out prior to commissioning, 89
Circuit diagram, 69
Cleaning, 110
Spent grease chamber, 116
Condensation, 44, 58
Connecting cables
Selection of, 68, 75
Connection
Electrical, 70
External fan, 75
Holding brake, 83
Speed encoder, 82
Temperature sensor, 83
Connection data, 70
Converter, 24
Cooling, 31
Cooling capacity, 25
Cooling method, 25
Cooling water
Connection, 65
Specification, 29
Cooling water intake temperature, 30
Cooling water supply, 90, 97
Corrective maintenance
Initial inspection, 107
Corrosion protection, 45
Creepage distance, 72
D
Degree of protection, 25
Disassembly, 120
Disposal, 158
External fan, 127
Machine, 119
Disposal
Chemicals, 159
Components, 158
Drive, 24
DRIVE-CLiQ, 67, 130
E
Electromagnetic fields, 19
EMC cable glands, 70
Emergency off, 99
Emitted interference, 19
Environmental requirements, 26
Equipotential bonding, 74
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 323
Equipotential bonding conductor, 46, 84
ESD guidelines, 18
External fan, 25, 33, 145
Connection, 75, 77, 78
Filter mat, 118
Maintaining, 116
Maintenance, 116
Refitting, 66, 126
F
Faults
Electrical, 101, 102
Holding brake, 103
Inspection, 100, 107
Mechanical, 102
Roller bearings, 103
Faults in operation, 96
Fixing, 67
Flammable substances, 17
Flange-mounted motors, 65
Foundation surfaces, 54
G
General inspection, 108
Geometry of the flange, 54
H
Hazardous substances, 17
Hearing damage, 17, 35
Holding brake, 26, 167
Connection, 83
Faults, 103
Magnetic field, 87
Spare parts, 134
Hot surfaces, 17
Hotline, 162
I
Initial inspection, 109
Inspection
Faults, 100, 107
Installation
Initial inspection, 107
Insulated bearings, 46
Insulation resistance, 50, 88, 109
Anti-condensation heating, 53
measure, 51
Interference immunity, 19
Interference voltages, 19
Interlocking circuit
Anti-condensation heating, 33
External fan, 33
L
Lifting, 37, 57
Line operation, 24
Live parts, 16
Long-term storage, 43
Low-Voltage Directive, 15
M
Machine
Mounting, 61
setting down, 60
Machine design, 23
IEC, 23
Main inspection, 110
Maintenance
Cooling system, 116
Maintenance intervals, 105
Maximum speed, 91
Flange mounting, 65
Minimum clearances, 72
Motor
Aligning, 63
Mounting
Flange, 65
Motor feet, 65
Mounting-foot hole dimensions, 54
N
Noise emissions, 17, 35
O
Operating mode, 29
Operating pressure, 66
Output element, 56
Overspeeds, 29
Index
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
324 Operating Instructions 01/2019
P
Paint finish, 27
Paint system, 131
Paintwork damage, 131
Permanent lubrication, 109
Pipe connection, 32
Polarization index, 50, 53, 88, 109
Preparations for assembly, 50
Pressure drop, 33, 66
Property class, 61
Protecting ring, 122
Protective conductor, 85
Q
Qualified personnel, 16
R
Rating plate, 21
Bar code, 133
REACH regulation, 157
Re-commissioning, 100
Regreasing, 109, 114
Regreasing device, 110
Regreasing intervals, 108
Regreasing system, 115
Residual risks, 29
Restriction of certain Hazardous Substances, 157
Risk of explosion, 21
RoHS, 157
Roller bearings
faults, 103
Versions, 27
Rolling bearings
Replacement, 134
Rotating parts, 16
Rotor, 22
attach, 119
Rotor shipping brace, 39, 43
S
Safety instructions
Flammable substances, 17
Hazardous substances, 17
Hot surfaces, 17
Live parts, 16
Rotating parts, 16
Screws with preCOTE coating, 120
Sealing, 73
Sealing agent, 124
Selection of bolts, 61
Sensor module, 131
Shaft assembly, 35
Siemens Industry Online Support
App, 162
Siemens Service Center, 162
Spare parts, 133
External fan option L75, 145
Holding brake, 134
Motor, 135, 144
Roller bearing cartridge NDE, 141, 142, 150, 151,
152
Rolling-contact bearing bush, drive end, 136, 137,
138, 139, 146, 147, 148, 149
Rolling-contact bearing bush, non-drive end, 140,
143, 153
Speed encoder, 155, 156
Terminal box, 154
Spare parts ordering, 133
Spares on Web, 134
Speed, 35
Speed encoder
Connection, 82
Electrical connection, 130
Mounting, 129
Separating, 129
Speed monitoring, 98
Spent grease chamber, 116
Stoppages, 99
Roller bearings, 99
storage
Indoor, 42
Supplementary devices, 25
Switching on, 91, 92
System resonances, 35
T
Technical Support, 162
Temperature sensor
Connection, 83
Terminal box, 69, 70
Maintaining, 118
Sealing, 74
Terminal designation, 69
Test run, 92
Thermal motor protection, 34
Index
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
Operating Instructions 01/2019 325
Threadlocker, 120
Tightening torques, 67
Bolted connection, 163
Torsional loadings, 35
Training, 161
Transporting, 37, 38, 57
Type of balancing, 55, 57
Types of construction, 24
V
Vibration response of the system, 61
Vibration severity, 61
Vibration values, 35, 92
W
Water drain hole, 44, 59
Water drainage hole, 58
Index
SIMOTICS M-1PH8 1PH818., 1PH822., 1PH828.
326 Operating Instructions 01/2019
AA Manual STROMAG Break
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G250RR03H4
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G280RR03H4
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G250RR17H9
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G280RR04H9
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G250RR03M4
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G280RR03M4
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G250RR17M9
AA OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_K3G280RR04M9
AB OPERATING_INSTRUCTION_G3G280BR04M7
Further Information
www.siemens.com/drives
Siemens AG
Process Industries and Drives
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
